Toshiba SD-V330SC1 DVD Video Player & Video Cassette Recorder Service Manual
The Toshiba SD-V330SC1 DVD Video Player & Video Cassette Recorder is a versatile device that combines the features of a DVD player and a VCR. This combination allows you to enjoy both DVD and VHS tapes on your TV. It also offers a range of recording and playback features, including timer recording, stereo recording, and playback of Video CDs equipped with the PBC (Playback Control) function.
Advertisement
Advertisement
FILE NO. 810-200545
SERVICE MANUAL
DVD VIDEO PLAYER & VIDEO
CASSETTE RECORDER
SD-V330SC1
-NOTICE-
Please see the rating label on the back panel and confirm the model name before repair.
DOCUMENT CREATED IN JAPAN, May, 2005
- IMPORTANT -
CANADIAN WARRANTY INFORMATION
GARANTIE CANADIENNE
GARANTIE NORMALE
TYPE DÕAPPAREIL
STANDARD WARRANTY
TYPE OF SET DVD Player
DVD/VCR Combination
Home Theatre in a Box
DVD Recorder
Portable DVD
12 MONTHS WARRANTY PERIOD
CANADIAN WARRANTY
Toshiba of Canada Limited (TCL) makes the following limited warranties to original consumers in Canada.
Please retain your ÒBill of SaleÓ as proof of purchase.
To obtain a ÒCanadian WarrantyÓ please register online at www.toshiba.ca.
DURE DE LA GARANTIE:
Lecteur DVD
DVD/magntoscope combo
Cinma maison dans une bote
Enregistreur DVD
DVD Portatif
12 MOIS
GARANTIE CANADIENNE
1) Toshiba du Canada Limite (TCL) offre au Canada les garanties limites suivantes aux consommateurs originaux. Veuillez conserver votre Ç facture È comme preuve dÕachat. Pour obtenir une garantie canadienne, veuillez vous inscrire en ligne www.toshiba.ca
Canadian Warranty Information
Should service be required on this unit during the one year warranty period, TCL's option will be to repair or exchange the defective unit. It will be necessary to follow this procedure:
Contact: Toshiba of Canada Limited at the Consumer
Phone:
Email:
Electronics Group, customer support line.
1-800-268-3404 [email protected]
All in-warranty repairs must be made by an authorized TCL service centre.
For service exchange TCL will arrange to have the unit picked up by courier and a replacement unit will be returned via same courier. (Note: A major credit card number will be required as a charge of $25.00 will apply if no fault is found with the unit.)
During the first 3 months of ownership, a new unit will be supplied as a replacement. During the remainder of the warranty period a service-renewed unit will be supplied.
The original ÒBill of SaleÓ must be provided as proof of purchase (it will be returned with the replacement unit.)
This 12-month warranty will be strictly adhered to.
Out of warranty units should be repaired by a TCL authorized service centre.
Note: It is the responsibility of the owner to ensure proper packaging. Should damage in shipping occur, due to poor packaging, a charge back for the repair will result.
This warranty applies to the original purchaser only and is not transferable.
This warranty does not apply to sets that have been subjected to misuse, neglect, accident, physical damage or acts of nature.
Sets with the serial number removed, altered, replaced or defaced will not be covered by this warranty.
The warranties from TCL are effective only if the product is purchased in Canada from an authorized TCL dealer and operated in Canada.
Products utilized for rental or commercial purposes are not covered by this warranty.
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, guaranties or agreements, whether expressed or implied, and no person, agent distributor, dealer, service centre or company is authorized to change, modify or extend its terms in any manner whatsoever.
Information sur la garantie Canadienne
Si vous avez besoin de service sur cet appareil au cours le l'anne de garantie, Toshiba du Canada Limite aura l'option de rparer ou changer l'appareil dfectueux. Vous devrez suivre la procdure suivante:
Contact: Toshiba du Canada Limite au Groupe lectronique aux consommateurs, service la clientle.
Tl: 1-800-268-3404
Courriel: [email protected]
Toutes les rparations au cours de la garantie doivent tre faites par un centre de service autoris Toshiba.
Pour un change TCL s'assurera qu'un service de courrier ramassera l'unit et qu'un appareil de remplacement soit expdi par le mme service de courrier.
(Note: Un numro de carte de crdit sera requis car une charge de 25,00$ sera applique si toutefois lÕappareil nÕavait aucun problme de fonctionnement.)
Une nouvelle unit sera fournie comme remplacement durant les premiers 3 mois de proprit. Par contre durant la balance de la garantie une unit remise neuf sera fournie.
La Çfacture originale doit tre fournie comme preuve dÕachat
(elle vous sera retourne avec lÕunit de remplacement.)
Cette garantie de 12 mois sera strictement adhre.
Les units hors de garantie devraient tre rpares par un centre de service autoris Toshiba.
Note: CÕest la responsabilit du propritaire de sÕassurer que lÕemballage est adquat. Vous serez factur pour toutes rparations causes par des dommages encourus cause dÕun emballage non adquat.
Cette garantie est octroye lÕacheteur initial et nÕest pas transfrable. Cette garantie ne sÕaplique pas aux appareils qui ont t sujets aux abus, ngligences, accidents, dommages physiques ou actes naturels.
Les appareils dont le numro de srie a t enlev, altr, remplac ou barbouill ne sont pas couverts par cette garantie.
Les garanties de TCL sont valides seulement sur les units sont achetes et utilises au Canada d'un marchand autoris
TCL.
Cette garantie ne couvre pas les produits de location ou usage commercial. Cette garantie remplace toutes autres garanties ou ententes exprimes ou sous-entendues. Aucune personne, agent, distributeur, concessionaire ou compagnie nÕest autoris changer, modifier ou prolonger les termes de cette garantie de quelque faon que ce soit.
Toshiba of Canada Limited 191 McNabb Street Markham, Ontario L3R 8H2
ColorStream and ColorStream Pro are registered trademarks of Toshiba America Consumer Products, L.L.C.
Printed in Thailand
Introduction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER
(OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO
RAIN OR MOISTURE. DANGEROUS HIGH VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT INSIDE THE ENCLOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN THE CABINET. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY.
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT USE THIS POLARIZED PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION
CORD, RECEPTACLE OR OTHER OUTLET UNLESS THE BLADES CAN BE FULLY INSERTED
TO PREVENT BLADE EXPOSURE.
FCC NOTICE
:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the partly responsible for compliance with the
FCC Rules could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
CAUTION:
THIS DIGITAL VIDEO PLAYER EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.
TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ THIS USER'S GUIDE CARE-
FULLY AND RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE MAINTE-
NANCE, CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE LOCATION.
USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER
THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, DO NOT TRY TO OPEN THE ENCLO-
SURE. VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED.
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.
2
Location of the required Marking
The rating sheet and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.
CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION PERFORMANCE
STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.
DIGITAL VIDEO
DVD VIDEO PLAYER & VIDEO
CASSETTE RECORDER
SD-V330SC1
OWNER’S MANUAL
Introduction
2
Connections
14
Basic setup
(VCR)
22
Playback
(VCR)
29
Recording
(VCR)
34
Other functions
(VCR)
39
Basic playback
(DVD)
42
Advanced playback
(DVD)
45
Function setup
(DVD)
55
Others
61
SD-V330
©2005 Toshiba Corporation
This device does not tape-record copy protected DVD Video Discs.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
1. READ INSTRUCTIONS
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated.
2. RETAIN INSTRUCTIONS
The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.
3. HEED WARNINGS
All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.
4. FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS
All operating and use instructions should be followed.
5. CLEANING
Unplug this unit from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
Use a soft dry cloth for cleaning the exterior cabinet only.
6. ATTACHMENTS
The manufacturer of this unit does not make any recommendations for attachments, as they may cause hazards.
7. WATER AND MOISTURE
Do not use this unit near water. For example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.
8. ACCESSORIES
Do not place this unit on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table.
The unit may fall, causing serious injury, and serious damage to the unit.
8A. An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn.
PORTABLE CART WARNING
(symbol provided by RETAC)
9. VENTILATION
Slots and openings in the cabinet back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the unit, and to protect it from overheating.
S3125A
These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the unit on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This unit should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat source. This unit should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided and/or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.
10. POWER SOURCE
This unit should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the rating plate. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company.
11. GROUNDING OR POLARIZATION
This unit is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding-type plug.
12. POWER-CORD PROTECTION
Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance.
3
Introduction
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
13. LIGHTNING
To protect your unit from a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the unit due to lightning and power line surges.
14. POWER LINES
An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall onto or against such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits, as contact with them might be fatal.
15. OVERLOADING
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
16. OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY
Do not push objects through any openings in this unit, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill or spray any type of liquid into the unit.
17. OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUNDING
If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the unit, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges, Section 810 of the
National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER THE
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE
4
GROUND CLAMP
ELECTRIC SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
NEC-NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
S2898A
18. SERVICING
Do not attempt to service this unit yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
For example: a. When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.
b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the unit.
c. If the unit has been exposed to rain or water.
d. If the unit does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions, as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the unit to its normal operation.
e. If the unit has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
f . When the unit exhibits a distinct change in performance, this indicates a need for service.
Introduction
Precautions
Notes on handling
When shipping the DVD/VCR, the original shipping carton and packing materials come in handy. For maximum protection, repack the unit as it was originally packed at the factory.
Do not use volatile liquids, such as insect spray, near the DVD/VCR. Do not leave rubber or plastic products to contact the DVD/VCR for a prolonged period. They will leave marks on the finish.
The top and rear panels of the DVD/VCR may become warm after a long period of use. This is not a malfunction.
When the DVD/VCR is not in use, be sure to remove the disc and the video cassette turn off the power.
If you do not use the DVD/VCR for a long period, the unit may not function properly in the future. Turn on and use the DVD/VCR occasionally.
Notes on moisture condensation
Moisture condensation damages the DVD/VCR.
Please read the following carefully.
Moisture condensation occurs, for example, when you pour a cold drink into a glass on a warm day. Drops of water form on the outside of the glass. In the same way, moisture may condense on the head drum or the optical pick-up lens inside this unit, one of the most crucial internal parts of the DVD/VCR.
Exam ple of moisture condensation!
Tape
Head drum
Notes on locating
Place the DVD/VCR on a level surface. Do not use it on a shaky or unstable surface such as a wobbling table or inclined stand. The loaded disc or the video tape may become dis-aligned and damage the DVD/
VCR.
When you place this DVD/VCR near a TV, radio, or
VCR, the playback picture may become poor and the sound may be distorted. In this case, place the DVD/
VCR away from the TV, radio, or VCR.
Moisture condensation occurs during the following cases.
When you bring the DVD/VCR directly from a cold place to a warm place.
When you use the DVD/VCR in a room where you just turned on the heater, or a place where the cold wind from the air conditioner directly hits the unit.
In summer, when you use the DVD/VCR in a hot and humid place just after you move the unit from an air conditioned room.
When you use the DVD/VCR in a humid place.
It’s too warm!
Notes on cleaning
Use a soft, dry cloth for cleaning.
Use a dry cloth to wipe.
Do not use any type of solvent, such as thinner and benzine, as they may damage the surface of the
DVD/VCR.
If you use a chemical saturated cloth to clean the unit, follow that product’s instructions.
Do not use the DVD/VCR when moisture condensation may occur.
If you use the DVD/VCR in such a situation, it may damage discs and internal parts. Remove the disc or the video tape, connect the power cord of the DVD/
VCR to the wall outlet, turn on the DVD/VCR, and leave it for two or three hours. After two or three hours, the DVD/VCR will have warmed up and evaporated any moisture. Keep the DVD/VCR connected to the wall outlet and moisture condensation will seldom occur.
Wait!
Wall outlet
6
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
/ Power source
19. REPLACEMENT PARTS
When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician uses replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or those that have the same characteristics as the original part.
Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.
20. SAFETY CHECK
Upon completion of any service or repairs to this unit, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the unit is in proper operating condition.
21. HEAT
The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
22. DISC TRAY
Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray as it is closing. It may cause serious personal injury.
23. CONNECTING
When you connect the product to other equipment, turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet. Failure to do so may cause a product damage. Read the owner's manual of the other equipment carefully and follow the instructions when making any connections.
24. LASER BEAM
Do not look into the opening of the disc tray or ventilation opening of the product to see the source of the laser beam. It may cause sight damage.
25. DISC
Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easily broken and may cause serious personal injury and product malfunction.
26. NOTE TO CABLE TV SYSTEM INSTALLER
This reminder is provided to call the Cable TV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.
Power source
Wider Hole and Blade
AC Outlet
Polarized AC Cord Plug
(One blade is wider than the other.)
TO USE AC POWER SOURCE
Use the AC polarized line cord provided for operation on AC. Insert the AC cord plug into a standard 120V 60Hz polarized AC outlet.
Notes:
• Never connect the AC line cord plug to other than the specified voltage (120V 60Hz). Use the attached power cord only.
• If the polarized AC cord does not fit into a non-polarized AC outlet, do not attempt to file or cut the blade. It is the user’s responsibility to have an electrician replace the obsolete outlet.
• If you cause a static discharge when touching the unit and the unit fails to function, simply unplug the unit from the AC outlet and plug it back in. The unit should return to normal operation.
5
Notes on discs
On handling discs
Do not touch the playback side of the disc.
Structure of disc contents
Normally, DVD video discs are divided into titles, and the titles are sub-divided into chapters. VIDEO CDs and audio CDs are divided into tracks.
DVD video disc
Title 1
Chapter 1 Chapter 2
DVD video disc
Title 2
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3
Do not attach paper or tape to discs.
Playback side
Video CD/Audio CD
Video CD/Audio CD
Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5
On cleaning discs
Fingerprints and dust on the disc cause picture and sound deterioration. Wipe the disc from the center outwards with a soft cloth. Always keep the disc clean.
Do not use any type of solvent such as thinner, benzine, commercially available cleaners or antistatic spray for vinyl LPs. It may damage the disc.
On storing discs
Do not store discs in a place subject to direct sunlight or near heat sources.
Do not store discs in places subject to moisture and dust such as a bathroom or near a humidifier.
Store discs vertically in a case. Stacking or placing objects on discs outside of their case may cause warping.
Each title, chapter or track is assigned a number, which is called “title number”, “chapter number” or “track number” respectively.
There may be discs that do not have these numbers.
Notes on copyright
The unauthorized recording, use, distribution, or revision of television programs, videotapes, DVDs and other materials, is prohibited under the Copyright Laws of the United States and other countries, and may subject you to civil and/or criminal liability.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
7
Introduction
Notes on discs (continued)
8
About this owner’s manual
This owner’s manual explains the basic instructions of this DVD/VCR. Some DVD video discs are produced in a manner that allows specific or limited operation during playback. As such, the DVD/VCR may not respond to all operating commands. This is not a defect in the DVD/
VCR. Refer to instruction notes of discs.
“
A “
” may appear on the TV screen during operation.
” means that the operation is not permitted by the
DVD/VCR or the disc.
For example, sometimes it is unable to stop the playback of copyright message of the disc when the
STOP ( ) button is pressed. Alternatively, the “ ” may also indicate that the feature is not available for the disc.
Playable discs
This DVD/VCR can play the following discs.
Disc Mark Contents
Disc
Size
Maximum playback time
Approx. 4 hours
(single sided disc)
12 cm
DVD video discs
Audio
+
Video
(moving pictures)
Approx. 8 hours
(double sided disc)
Approx. 80 minutes
(single sided disc)
8 cm
Approx. 160 minutes
(double sided disc)
Notes on region numbers
The region number of this DVD/VCR is 1. If region numbers, which stand for their playable area, are printed on your DVD video disc and you do not find
1
or
ALL
, disc playback will not be allowed by the player. (In this case, the DVD/VCR will display a message on-screen.)
Video
CDs
DIGITAL VIDEO
Audio
+
Video
(moving pictures)
12 cm
Approx. 74 minutes
8 cm Approx. 20 minutes
On Video CDs
This DVD/VCR supports Video CDs equipped with the
PBC (Version 2.0) function. (PBC is the abbreviation of
Playback Control.) You can enjoy two playback variations depending on types of discs.
• Video CD not equipped with PBC function
(Version 1.1)
Sound and movie can be played on this DVD/VCR in the same way as an audio CD.
• Video CD equipped with PBC function
(Version 2.0)
In addition to operation of a Video CD not equipped with the PBC function, you can enjoy playback of interactive software with search function by using the menu displayed on the TV screen (Menu Playback).
Some of the functions described in this owner’s manual may not work with some discs.
12 cm Approx. 74 minutes
Audio
CDs
Audio
8 cm
(CD single)
Approx. 20 minutes
The following discs are also available.
DVD-R/RW discs of DVD video format
CD-R/CD-RW discs of CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD,
MP3, WMA or JPEG format
Kodak Picture CD and FUJICOLOR CD format
Some of these discs may be incompatible.
• You cannot play discs other than those listed above.
• You cannot play discs of DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM,
Photo CD, etc., or non standardized discs even if they may be labeled as above.
• Some CD-R/RWs cannot be played back depending on the recording conditions.
• This DVD/VCR uses the NTSC color system, and cannot play DVD video discs recorded in any other color system (PAL, SECAM, etc.).
Because of problems and errors that can occur during the creation of DVD and Video CD software and/or the manufacture of DVD and Video CD discs, Toshiba cannot guarantee that this DVD/VCR will play every feature of every DVD bearing the DVD logo and/or every Video CD bearing the CD logo.
As one of the creators of DVD technology, Toshiba DVD players are manufactured using the highest standards of quality, and as a result, such incompatibilities are rare.
If you happen to experience any difficulty playing a DVD or a Video CD on a this DVD/VCR, please feel free to call our Contact listed in “CANADIAN WARRANTY
INFORMATION” (back cover).
Introduction
Identification of controls
See the page in for details.
Front panel
Cassette loading slot
29
ON/STANDBY button
22
REC button
34
Remote sensor
DVD indicator
13
42
OPEN/CLOSE button
42
REW button
30
Disc tray
42
EJECT button
29
AUDIO (L/R)/VIDEO IN
(LINE IN 2) jacks
CHANNEL /
VCR indicator
buttons
34
22
VCR/DVD mode selector button
22
STOP button
30
Display window
11
40
FF button
PLAY button
30
30
Rear panel
DVD COAXIAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT jack
20
DVD S-VIDEO OUT jack
19
DVD/VCR common AUDIO
(L/R)/VIDEO OUT jacks
18
ANT IN jack
14
10
AC power cord
5
DVD COMPONENT
OUT jacks
19
DVD AUDIO (L/R)
OUT jacks
19
AUDIO (L/R)/VIDEO
IN (LINE IN1) jacks
40
ANT OUT jack
14
Contents
Introduction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................ 2
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS .......................... 3
Power source ................................................... 5
Precautions ...................................................... 6
Notes on discs .................................................. 7
Contents. .......................................................... 9
Identification of controls ................................. 10
Connections
Antenna connections ...................................... 14
Cable TV connections .................................... 16
Connecting to a TV ........................................ 18
Connecting to optional equipment .................. 20
Basic setup (VCR)
Setting the video channel ............................... 22
Setting the language ...................................... 23
Clock setting ................................................... 24
Tuner setting ................................................... 27
Playback (VCR)
Loading and unloading a cassette tape ......... 29
Cassette tape playback .................................. 30
Special playback ............................................ 31
Convenience function ..................................... 32
Recording (VCR)
Recording a TV program ................................ 34
One-touch Timer Recording (OTR) ................ 36
Timer recording .............................................. 37
Other functions (VCR)
Stereo recording and playback ...................... 39
Second Audio Program (SAP) ........................ 39
Duplicating a video tape ................................. 40
Recording a DVD/CD disc .............................. 41
Basic playback (DVD)
Playing a disc ................................................. 42
Advanced playback (DVD)
Zooming ......................................................... 45
Locating desired scene .................................. 45
Marking the scenes ................................... 46
Returning to the scenes ............................ 46
Repeat playback ............................................ 47
A-B Repeat playback ..................................... 47
Program playback .......................................... 48
Random playback .......................................... 48
Changing angles ............................................ 49
Title selection ................................................. 49
DVD menu ...................................................... 49
Changing soundtrack language ..................... 50
Setting surround sound .................................. 50
Subtitles ......................................................... 51
To turn off the PBC ......................................... 51
MP3/WMA/JPEG operation ............................ 52
MP3/WMA/JPEG CD information ............. 52
MP3/WMA CD playback ............................ 53
JPEG CD playback ................................... 54
Slide show playback ................................. 54
Function setup (DVD)
Customizing the function settings .................. 55
Setting procedure ...................................... 55
Setting details ........................................... 56
Temporary disabling of rating level by
DVD disc ........................................................ 60
Others
Language code list ......................................... 61
Troubleshooting ............................................. 62
Specifications ................................................. 63
CANADIAN WARRANTY INFORMATION ..... back cover
9
Display window
Play indicator
VCR indicator (VCR) Still indicator
Disc inserted indicator (DVD)
Recording indicator (VCR)
Disc inserted indicator (CD)
AM/PM indicator
(AM is not displayed)
Track indicator (CD) Multifunctional indicator
Tape loaded indicator (VCR) Progressive indicator
Timer Recording indicator (VCR)
VCR operation status
Press CALL to display VCR operation status on the screen.
To cancel the display, press CALL again.
While watching TV While operating a tape
DAY OF THE WEEK
HI-FI STEREO
CLOCK
STEREO AND
SECOND
AUDIO
PROGRAM
(SAP)
8 : 47AM MON
STEREO SAP
CH 125
00 : 00 : 00 SP
CHANNEL
TAPE SPEED
8 : 30AM MON
HI-FI
STEREO 00 : 15 : 12 SP
VCR Icons
Recording :
OPERATING
MODE
AUTO REPEAT
TAPE IN
Rec/Pause :
Play :
Stop :
Eject :
REAL TIME COUNTER
OUTPUT SELECTION
DVD/CD/VCD operation status
Each press of DISPLAY, the status display of the disc will appear on the screen and change as follows.
DVD
DISC OPERATION
TITLE NO.
ELAPSED
TIME
00:34:56 01:12:33
TOTAL
TIME
Title 1/99
00:34:56 01:12:33
Chapter 1/999 1/9
1/8
1/32
Eng DolbyDigital
Eng
ANGLE NO.
CHAPTER NO.
A KIND OF AUDIO
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
DISC
OPERATION
TRACK NO.
CD/VCD
Track 11/99
34:56 71:33
TOTAL
TIME
ELAPSED TIME
11
Introduction
Identification of Controls (continued)
The instructions in this manual describe the functions on the remote control. See the page in for details.
Remote control
12
VCR DVD button
22
EJECT button (VCR)
29
CLOCK/COUNTER button 33
VCR MENU button
23
SETUP button 55
CM SKIP button
ZOOM button
31
45
TOP MENU button
Direction buttons ( / / /
SET+/– buttons
CH+/– buttons
)
45
23
34
CANCEL button 26
CLEAR button
45
STOP button
30
49
42
PAUSE/STEP button 31
43
INDEX– button
SKIP button
33
44
REW button 30
44
REC/OTR button 34 36
TIMER REC button
37
Direct channel selection buttons (0–9)
Number buttons (0–9)
28
45
COUNTER RESET button
32
ANGLE button 49
ATR button
31
SUBTITLE button
51
MENU button
Use the MENU button to display the menu included on many DVD video discs. To operate a menu, follow the instructions in “DVD Menu.”
49
POWER button
22
OPEN/CLOSE button (DVD) 42
TV/VCR button 22
INPUT SELECT button
40
SLOW button
31 44
MENU button
49
ENTER button
23 55
RETURN button
55
PLAY button 30
42
INDEX+ button
SKIP button
33
44
FF button
30 44
A-B RPT button 47
SP/SLP button 34
PLAY MODE button 47
CALL button 11
DISPLAY button 11
ZERO RETURN button
SEARCH button
45
32
MARKER button
46
AUDIO SELECT button 39
AUDIO button
50
Connections
Antenna connections
If you are using an antenna system, follow these instructions. If you are a Cable TV subscriber, skip ahead to page 16 for the proper connections.
Antenna to DVD/VCR connection
The DVD/VCR must be connected “between” the antenna and the TV. First, disconnect the antenna from the TV and connect it to the DVD/VCR. Then connect the DVD/VCR to the TV. Below are 3 common methods of connecting an antenna system to a DVD/VCR. Find the type of antenna system you are using and follow the connection diagram.
1
Combination VHF/UHF Antenna with 75 ohm Coaxial Cable
DVD/VCR
75 ohm Coaxial Cable
IN
(ANT)
OUT
(TV)
2 Combination VHF/UHF Antenna with 300 ohm Twin Lead (Flat) Wire
DVD/VCR
Matching Transformer 300 ohm Input 75 ohm output (not supplied)
IN
(ANT)
OUT
(TV)
300 ohm Twin Lead (Flat) Wire
(not supplied)
Separate VHF and UHF Antennas
DVD/VCR
3
VHF
UHF
Combiner 75/300 ohm Inputs 75 ohm output
(not supplied)
300 ohm Twin Lead (Flat) Wire
(not supplied)
IN
(ANT)
OUT
(TV)
75 ohm Coaxial Cable
Note:
If both VHF and UHF antennas have 300 ohm twin lead (flat) wires, use a combiner having two 300 ohm inputs and one 75 ohm output.
Notes:
• A clear picture will not be obtained by the DVD/VCR unless the antenna signal is good. Connect the antenna to the DVD/VCR properly.
• For better quality recording, an indoor antenna or a telescopic antenna is not recommended. The use of an outdoor type antenna is required.
• If you are not sure about the connection, please refer to qualified service personnel.
14
Inserting batteries
1
Open the battery compartment cover in the direction of the arrow.
2
Install two “AAA” batteries (supplied), paying attention to the polarity diagram in the battery compartment.
3
Replace the compartment cover.
Caution:
Never throw batteries into a fire.
Notes:
• Be sure to use AAA size batteries.
• Dispose of batteries in a designated disposal area.
• Batteries should always be disposed of with the environment in mind. Always dispose of batteries in accordance with applicable laws and regulations.
• If the remote control does not operate correctly, or if the operating range becomes reduced, replace batteries with new ones.
• When necessary to replace batteries in the remote control, always replace both batteries with new ones. Never mix battery types or use new and used batteries in combination.
• Always remove batteries from remote control if they are dead or if the remote control is not to be used for an extended period of time. This will prevent battery acid from leaking into the battery compartment.
Remote control basics
• Press POWER to turn the DVD/VCR on or off.
• Select your desired operating mode (DVD or VCR) using VCR DVD.
(DVD or VCR indicator on the front panel will show you which mode is selected.)
• Press CH + or CH – to move through the channels one channel at a time.
• The
/ / /
are also used to navigate on-screen menu system.
• You can directly access specific channels using Direct channel selection buttons (0–9).
• Each press of VCR DVD on the remote control, switches the screen between the VCR screen (VCR mode) and the
DVD screen (DVD mode).
Operation
• Aim the remote control at the remote sensor and press control buttons to operate.
• Operate the remote control within 30
°
angle on either side of the remote sensor, up to a distance of approx. 7 meters.
Approx. 7 meters
13
DVD/VCR to TV connection
After you have connected the antenna to the DVD/VCR, you must connect the DVD/VCR to the TV.
Below are 3 common methods of connecting your DVD/VCR to a TV. Find the type of TV you are using and follow the connection diagram.
This DVD/VCR has a single 75 ohm output for connection to a TV. If your TV has separate VHF and UHF antenna inputs (numbers 2 and 3 below), use a splitter to connect the DVD/VCR to the TV for VHF and UHF reception.
75 ohm Coaxial Cable (supplied)
TV
VHF/UHF IN
Note: If a VHF or UHF antenna is used, set the TV/CABLE menu option to the “TV” mode.
TV with single 75 ohm VHF/UHF antenna input
75 ohm Coaxial Cable
(supplied)
Splitter 75 ohm Input
75/300 ohm outputs
(not supplied)
75 ohm Coaxial Cable
(supplied)
Splitter 75 ohm Input
300 ohm outputs
(not supplied)
TV
UHF
VHF
Note: If a VHF or UHF antenna is used, set the TV/CABLE menu option to the “TV” mode.
TV with 300 ohm UHF and 75 ohm VHF antenna inputs
TV
UHF
VHF
Note: If a VHF or UHF antenna is used, set the TV/CABLE menu option to the “TV” mode.
TV with 300 ohm UHF and 300 ohm VHF antenna inputs
15
Connections
Cable TV connections
Many cable companies offer services permitting reception of extra channels including pay or subscription channels. This
DVD/VCR has an extended tuning range and can be tuned to most cable channels without using a cable company supplied converter box, except for those premium channels which are intentionally scrambled. If you subscribe to a premium channel which is scrambled, you must have a descrambler box for proper reception.
1
DVD/VCR
TV
VHF/UHF
IN (ANT) Incoming Cable
IN
(ANT)
OUT
(TV)
2
Allows: * Recording of nonscrambled channels.
* Use of the programmable timer.
* Recording of one channel while watching another.
DVD/VCR
Converter/
Descrambler
Incoming
Cable
IN
(ANT)
OUT
(TV)
Allows: * Recording of channels through the converter box
(scrambled and unscrambled).
* Using the programmable timer to record only the channel selected at the converter box.
Prevents: * Recording one channel while watching another.
* Using the DVD/VCR tuner to select channels.
TV
VHF/UHF
IN (ANT)
Note:
To record from converter/descrambler, DVD/
VCR tuner must be tuned to the converter output channel, usually channel 3 or 4.
DVD/VCR
3
Incoming Cable
IN
(ANT)
OUT
(TV)
Converter/Descrambler
TV
VHF/UHF
IN (ANT)
Allows: * Recording of nonscrambled channels.
* Use of the programmable timer.
* Recording an unscrambled channel while watching any channel selected at the converter box.
Prevents:
Recording scrambled channels.
Note:
If you are playing a tape or using the tuner built into the DVD/VCR, the converter must be set to the video channel output of the DVD/
VCR (either 3 or 4).
Note: Whenever a Converter/Descrambler box is placed before the DVD/VCR, you must tune the DVD/VCR to the output of the Converter/Descrambler box, usually channel 3 or 4.
16
Connections
Connecting to a TV
Connect the DVD/VCR to your TV.
Note: This method transports VHS and DVD-video signals. For enhanced DVD-video performance, we recommend you
also connect the S-video or ColorStream ® component video outputs to your TV/monitor.
19
Connecting to a TV
Signal flow
To wall outlet
(yellow) (red) (white)
To VIDEO
OUT
To ANALOG AUDIO OUT
Audio/video cable (supplied)
To video input
(yellow)
To audio inputs
(red) (white)
TV or monitor with audio/video inputs
Notes:
• Refer to the owner’s manual of the connected TV as well.
• When you connect the DVD/VCR to your TV, be sure to turn off the power and unplug both units from the wall outlet before making any connections.
• If your television set has one audio input, connect the left and right audio outputs of the DVD/VCR to a Y cable adapter (not supplied) and then connect to your TV.
• Connect the DVD/VCR directly to your TV. If you connect the DVD/VCR to a VCR, TV/VCR combination or video selector, the playback picture may be distorted as DVD video discs are copy protected.
18
IMPORTANT: Make sure the TV/CABLE menu option is set to the “CABLE” mode.
This DVD/VCR cannot receive scrambled programs since it does not contain a descrambler. In order to receive scrambled programs, your existing descrambler must be used. Descrambler boxes are available from cable companies. Consult your local cable company for more information concerning connection to their descrambler equipment. There are many ways to connect your DVD/VCR to a cable system. Below are six common methods of connection.
DVD/VCR
4
Splitter
TV
Incoming Cable
Converter/Descrambler
IN
(ANT)
OUT
(TV)
A/B Switch
A
B
VHF/UHF
IN (ANT)
Allows: * Recording of one channel while watching another.
* Using the programmable timer to record only the channel selected at the converter box.
* Recording of all channels through the converter box.
Prevents: * Watching scrambled channels while recording another channel.
* Using the DVD/VCR tuner to select channels.
5
DVD/VCR
TV
Splitter
Incoming Cable
Converter/Descrambler
IN
(ANT)
OUT
(TV)
VHF/UHF
IN (ANT)
A/B Switch
A
B
Allows: * Recording of nonscrambled channels.
* Recording of one channel while watching another.
Prevents:
* Watching premium channels through the converter while recording nonscrambled channels.
* Using the programmable timer.
*
Recording scrambled channels.
DVD/VCR
6
Splitter
Converter/Descrambler
TV
IN
(ANT)
OUT
(TV)
VHF/UHF
IN (ANT)
Incoming Cable
Converter/Descrambler
A/B Switch
A
B
Allows: * Recording of all channels through the converter box.
* Recording a scrambled or unscrambled channel while watching another (scrambled or unscrambled) channel.
* Using the programmable timer to record only the channel selected at the converter box.
Prevents:
Using the DVD/VCR tuner to select channels.
17
S-video output
An S-Video connection is superior to Video (Yellow) output. Use this method for DVD playback when the connected television has S-
Video input, and does not have component video inputs.
Component video outputs
PROGRESSIVE outputs
Some TVs or monitors are equipped with component video inputs that are capable of reproducing a progressively scanned video signal. Connecting to these inputs allows you to view the highest quality pictures with less flicker.
INTERLACED outputs
Some TVs or monitors are equipped with component video inputs. Connecting to these inputs allows you to enjoy the highest quality
DVD picture playback.
Notes:
• Actual labels for component video inputs may vary depending on the TV manufacturer. (ex. Y, R-Y, B-Y or Y, CB, CR)
• In some TVs or monitors, the color levels of the playback picture may be reduced slightly or the tint may change. In such a case, adjust the TV or monitor for optimum performance.
Connecting to an audio system and TV equipped with S-video input/component video inputs
The S-video output and component video output transports the DVD-video signal exclusively and will deliver enhanced DVD video picture performance.
Signal flow
To ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
(white)
(red)
To wall outlet
To switch the scan mode between the interlace and progressive modes, see page 59.
To S-
VIDEO
OUT
To P
R
/C
R
VIDEO
OUT
To P
B
/C
B
VIDEO
OUT
To Y
VIDEO
OUT
Component video cable
(not supplied)
If you connect the DVD/VCR to your TV with the DVD OUT jacks, select the corresponding video input on your television to watch
DVD video discs.
To Y video input
Audio cable (not supplied)
To audio inputs of the amplifier
(red) (white)
To P
B/
C
B
video input
To P
R/
C
R
video input
To S-video input
S-video cable (not supplied)
Audio system
TV or monitor with
ColorStream
® component video inputs
Notes:
• Refer to the owner’s manual of the connected equipment as well.
• When you connect the DVD/VCR to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet before making any connections.
• If you place the DVD/VCR near a tuner or radio, the radio broadcast sound might be distorted. In this case, place the DVD/
VCR away from the tuner and radio.
• The output sound of the DVD/VCR has a wide dynamic range. Be sure to adjust the receiver’s volume to a moderate listening level. Otherwise, the speakers may be damaged by a sudden high volume sound.
• Turn off the amplifier before you connect or disconnect the DVD/VCR’s power cord. If you leave the amplifier power on, the speakers may be damaged.
• When connecting to a TV using the Video or S-video jack, make sure that the Progressive indicator “ ” on the
display window is not lit. If it is lit, the Video and S-video outputs do not feed the correct signals and you cannot see any picture. To turn off the Progressive indicator, select PROGRESSIVE scan Off
59
.
19
Connections
Connecting to optional equipment
You can enjoy high quality dynamic sounds of DVD video discs or audio CDs by connecting the DVD/VCR to optional audio equipment.
For connection to your TV, see “Connecting to a TV”
18 19
.
• This selection uses the following reference mark.
: Front speaker
: Rear speaker
: Sub woofer
: Center speaker
: Signal flow
Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a Dolby Digital decoder
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is the surround sound technology used in theaters showing the latest movies, and is now available to reproduce this realistic effect in the home. You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs encoded via the Dolby Digital recording system with this dynamic realistic sound by connecting the DVD/VCR to a 6 channel amplifier equipped with a Dolby Digital decoder or Dolby Digital processor. If you have a Dolby Pro Logic Surround decoder, you will obtain the full benefit of Pro Logic from the same DVD movies that provide full 5.1-channel Dolby Digital soundtracks, as well as from titles with the Dolby Surround mark.
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” “Pro
Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• Use DVD video discs encoded via the Dolby Digital recording system.
Amplifier equipped with a
Dolby Digital decoder
To COAXIAL type digital audio input
75
Ω
coaxial cable (not supplied)
To COAXIAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
Connecting to an amplifier equipped with Dolby Surround Pro Logic
Dolby Surround Pro Logic
You can enjoy the dynamic realistic sound of Dolby Surround Pro Logic by connecting an amplifier and speaker system (right and left front speakers, a center speaker, and one or two rear speakers).
With an amplifier equipped with Dolby Digital
Connect the equipment the same way as described in “Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a Dolby Digital decoder.” Refer to that amplifier’s owner’s manual and set the amplifier so you can enjoy Dolby Surround Pro Logic sound.
With an amplifier not equipped with Dolby Digital
Connect the equipment as follows.
• This connection is only suitable for Video CDs and
Audio CDs.
*
Amplifier equipped with
Dolby Surround Pro Logic
* Connect one or two rear speakers.
The output sound from the rear speakers will be monaural even if you connect two rear speakers.
To audio input
Audio cable (not supplied)
To ANALOG
AUDIO OUT
Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a DTS decoder
Digital Theater Systems (DTS)
DTS is a high quality surround technology used in theaters and now available for home use, on DVD video discs or audio CDs.
If you have a DTS decoder or processor, you can obtain the full benefit of 5.1 channel DTS encoded sound tracks on DVD video discs or audio CDs.
Amplifier equipped with a
DTS decoder
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems,
Inc.
• Use DVD video discs or audio CDs encoded via the
DTS recording system.
To COAXIAL type digital audio input
75
Ω
coaxial cable (not supplied)
To COAXIAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
20
Basic setup (VCR)
Setting the video channel
When a TV is connected with the 75 ohm coaxial cable only.
To view playback of a recorded tape or DVD disc, or to watch a program selected by the VCR's channel selector, the TV must be set to channel 3 or 4 (video channel).
POWER
VCR DVD
TV/VCR
3
4
Setting the video channel
1 Press and hold 3 or 4 on the remote for 3 seconds in standby mode.
OR
The video channel will start to flash for 3 seconds in the display window.
2
Press POWER to turn on the DVD/VCR.
For a push-button TV tuner
If CH 3 or 4 corresponding to the video channel cannot be tuned on your TV, proceed as follows: set the VCR
3/4 channel selector and the TV to CH 3 or 4, play back a prerecorded tape and tune the TV to receive a sharp color picture from the video cassette recorder.
Refer to your TV owner's manual for details.
Note:
If the unit does not operate properly, or No key operation
(by the unit and/or the remote control): Static electricity, etc., may affect the player's operation. Disconnect the AC power cord once, then connect it again.
3 Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.
The VCR indicator on the front panel will light.
4
Turn ON the TV and set to CH 3 or 4 to correspond with the channel selected in step 1.
5 Press TV/VCR to select the VCR position.
The VCR indicator will appear in the display window.
6
Select any channel to receive a TV station in your area.
The channel number will appear on the screen for about 4 seconds.
22
Warning
When playing DTS-encoded discs (audio CDs), excessive noise may be output from the analog stereo jacks. To avoid possible damage to the audio system, you should take proper precautions when the ANALOG AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks of the
DVD/VCR are connected to an amplification system. (Do not leave the ANALOG AUDIO OUT (L/R) wires dangling.) To enjoy
DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an external 5.1 channel DTS Digital Surround™ decoder system must be connected to the
BITSTREAM/PCM AUDIO OUT jack of the DVD/VCR.
Connecting to an amplifier equipped with an MPEG2 audio decoder
MPEG2 sound
You can enjoy motion picture and live concert DVD video discs encoded via the MPEG2 recording system with dynamic realistic sound by connecting an amplifier equipped with an MPEG2 audio decoder or MPEG2 audio processor.
Amplifier equipped with an
MPEG2 audio decoder
• Use DVD video discs encoded via the MPEG2 recording system.
To COAXIAL type digital audio input
To COAXIAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
75
Ω
coaxial cable (not supplied)
Connecting to an amplifier equipped with a digital audio input
2 channel digital stereo
You can enjoy the dynamic sound of 2 channel digital stereo by connecting an amplifier equipped with a digital audio input and speaker system (right and left front speakers).
Amplifier equipped with a digital audio input
To COAXIAL type digital audio input
75
Ω
coaxial cable (not supplied)
To COAXIAL DIGITAL
AUDIO OUT
Notes:
• DO NOT connect the BITSTREAM/PCM AUDIO OUT jack of the DVD/VCR to the AC-3 RF input of a Dolby Digital Receiver.
This input on your A/V Receiver is reserved for Laserdisc use only and is incompatible with the BITSTREAM/PCM AUDIO
OUT jack of the DVD/VCR.
• Connect the BITSTREAM/PCM AUDIO OUT jack of the DVD/VCR to the “COAXIAL” input of a Receiver or Processor.
• Refer to the owner’s manual of the connected equipment as well.
• When you connect the DVD/VCR to other equipment, be sure to turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet before making any connections.
• The output sound of the DVD/VCR has a wide dynamic range. Be sure to adjust the receiver’s volume to a moderate listening level. Otherwise, the speakers and your hearing may be damaged by a sudden high volume sound.
• Turn off the amplifier before you connect or disconnect the DVD/VCR’s power cord. If you leave the amplifier power on, the speakers may be damaged.
21
Setting the language
You can choose from three different languages (English,
French and Spanish) for the on-screen displays.
VCR DVD
VCR MENU
ENTER
SET +/–
Setting the language
Preparation:
• Turn ON the TV and select to the corresponding video input.
• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.
(The VCR indicator will light.)
4
Press VCR MENU until the MENU screen is cleared.
1
Press VCR MENU.
The VCR menu screen will appear.
Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM
SETUP”, then press ENTER.
If you use the unit for the first time and press VCR MENU, instead of the main menu screen the “SYSTEM
SETUP” menu screen in step 2 may appear.
MENU
TIMER REC SET
AUTO REPEAT ON OFF
SAP
SYSTEM SETUP
ON OFF
Notes:
• Both the VCR and the DVD have their own player menus
55
.
• If no buttons are pressed for more than 60 seconds, the VCR
MENU screen will return to normal TV-operation automatically.
〈
+/-/ENTER/MENU
〉
2
Press SET + or – to select “LANGUAGE”, then press ENTER.
SYSTEM SETUP
CLOCK SET
LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/LANGUE
NO NOISE BACKGROUND
AUTO CLOCK
STANDARD TIME
ON OFF
ON OFF
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME
〈 +/-/ENTER/MENU 〉
3 Press SET + or – to select the desired language:
English (ENGLISH), Spanish (ESPAÑOL) or
French (FRANCAIS), then press ENTER.
LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/LANGUE
ENGLISH
ESPAOL
FRANCAIS
〈
+/-/ENTER/MENU
〉
23
Basic setup (VCR)
Clock setting
The AUTO CLOCK function will automatically set the built-in clock
(Month, Day, Year and Time) when the DVD/VCR is connected to an
Antenna or Cable system and it is turned off. The DVD/VCR searches for a station in your area containing the necessary AUTO CLOCK setting signals. Once received, it will take approximately 4 minutes for the clock to set itself automatically.
POWER
VCR DVD
VCR MENU
ENTER
SET +/–
CALL
AUTO CLOCK setting
Preparation:
• Turn ON the TV and select the corresponding video input.
• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.
(The VCR indicator will light.)
1 Connect the Antenna or Cable system.
• If you use a cable box, turn it on.
2 Plug the AC power cord to the AC outlet.
3 Make sure the DVD/VCR is turned off.
• If you press POWER, the Auto Clock set is not programmed.
4 Wait at least three minutes and press POWER.
To set AUTO CLOCK to off
When shipped from factory the AUTO CLOCK is set to “ON”.
But if you do not want AUTO CLOCK setting:
1 Press VCR MENU.
MENU
TIMER REC SET
AUTO REPEAT
CH SETUP
SYSTEM SETUP
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
2 Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM SETUP”, then press ENTER.
MENU
TIMER REC SET
AUTO REPEAT
CH SETUP
SYSTEM SETUP
ON
ON
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
OFF
OFF
5 Press CALL to check the clock setting on the on screen display.
8 : 47AM MON
STEREO SAP
CH 125
3
Press SET + or – to select “AUTO CLOCK”.
SYSTEM SETUP
CLOCK SET
LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/LANGUE
NO NOISE BACKGROUND
ON
ON
STANDARD TIME
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME
OFF
OFF
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
00 : 00 : 00 SP
6 If the clock is not set, check the antenna condition. The AUTO CLOCK may not function properly if the reception condition is not good.
4
Press ENTER to select “OFF”.
SYSTEM SETUP
CLOCK SET
LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/LANGUE
NO NOISE BACKGROUND
ON
ON
STANDARD TIME
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME
OFF
OFF
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
AUTO CLOCK adjustment
24
The auto clock adjustment will be updated at 6:00
AM, 12:00 PM and 6:00 PM everyday when the
DVD/VCR turned off.
• If you use a cable box and you want AUTO CLOCK adjustment to be performed, the cable box must be left on.
• The AUTO CLOCK adjustment is not effective when there is a difference of more than 5 minutes exists between the built-in clock time and the actual time.
5 Press VCR MENU repeatedly to return to the normal screen.
• When the AUTO CLOCK is set to
“OFF”, the AUTO CLOCK adjustment does not function.
• Set the clock manually
26
.
Basic setup (VCR)
Clock setting (continued)
If the AUTO CLOCK process did not set the date and time correctly, you must set them manually for timer recording and DAYLIGHT
SAVING TIME.
VCR MENU
SET +/–
ENTER
CANCEL
Manual clock setting
EXAMPLE: Setting the clock to “8:30 AM” March, 26
(SAT), 2005.
1
Press VCR MENU.
6 After setting the clock, date and time starts functioning automatically.
8 : 30AM SAT
26
2 Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM SETUP”, then press ENTER.
MENU
TIMER REC SET
AUTO REPEAT
SAP
SYSTEM SETUP
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
3
Press SET + or – to select “CLOCK SET”, then press ENTER.
SYSTEM SETUP
CLOCK SET
LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/LANGUE
NO NOISE BACKGROUND
AUTO CLOCK
STANDARD TIME
ON OFF
ON OFF
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME
〈 +/-/ENTER/MENU 〉
4
Press SET + or – to set the month, then press
ENTER.
MONTH
DAY
3
1 (TUE)
YEAR 2005
TIME 12 : 00AM
〈
+/Ð/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU
〉
To make corrections any time during the process
Press CANCEL repeatedly until the item you want to change blinks, then press SET + or –.
Note:
After a power failure or disconnection of the power, the timer settings will be lost. In this case, reset the present time.
5
Set the day, year and time as in step 4.
MONTH
DAY
YEAR
3
26 (SAT)
2005
TIME 8 : 30AM
〈 +/Ð/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU 〉
To set STANDARD TIME To set DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME
In the rare event that you live within broadcast range of two stations in two different time zones, the DVD/VCR may recognize the wrong station for the AUTO CLOCK setting.
To correct the situation:
You can set the DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME automatically or manually.
1
Press VCR MENU.
MENU
TIMER REC SET
AUTO REPEAT
CH SETUP
SYSTEM SETUP
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
1
Press VCR MENU.
Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM SETUP”, then press ENTER.
2
Press SET + or – to select “SYSTEM SETUP”, then press ENTER.
MENU
TIMER REC SET
AUTO REPEAT
CH SETUP
SYSTEM SETUP
ON
ON
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
OFF
OFF
MENU
TIMER REC SET
AUTO REPEAT
SAP
CH SETUP
SYSTEM SETUP
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
3
Press SET + or – to select “STANDARD TIME”, then press ENTER.
SYSTEM SETUP
CLOCK SET
LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/LANGUE
NO NOISE BACKGROUND
AUTO CLOCK
ON OFF
ON OFF
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME
〈 +/-/ENTER/MENU 〉
2
Press SET + or – to select “DAYLIGHT
SAVING TIME”, then press ENTER.
SYSTEM SETUP
CLOCK SET
AUTO CLOCK
STANDARD TIME
ON
ON
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME
OFF
OFF
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
4
5
Press SET + or – to select your time zone, then press ENTER.
ATLANTIC : GMT–4hours
EASTERN : GMT–5hours
CENTRAL : GMT–6hours
MOUNTAIN : GMT–7hours
PACIFIC : GMT–8hours
ALASKA
HAWAII
: GMT–9hours
: GMT–10hours
AUTO : AUTO SET
(GMT: Greenwich Mean Time)
Press VCR MENU until the MENU screen is cleared.
3 Press SET + or – to select one of the options, then press ENTER. Press VCR
MENU until the MENU screen is cleared.
ON:
OFF:
AUTO:
for manual setting
(forward one hour) for manual setting
(back one hour) for automatic setting
(read XDS in the signal)
When you want to set the DAYLIGHT
SAVING TIME manually, on the first
Sunday in April you set to “ON”, and on the last Sunday in October you set to “OFF”.
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME
ON
OFF
AUTO
〈 +/-/ENTER/MENU 〉
Notes:
• To be able to select the standard time, the clock must first be set by AUTO CLOCK once.
• If you live in Newfoundland and the AUTO CLOCK does not function properly, set the AUTO CLOCK menu option to “OFF” and set the clock manually.
Notes:
• When shipped from factory, the DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME is set to “AUTO” position.
• When the clock is not set, DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME setting is not available.
• When there is no DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME in your area, always select “OFF” position in step 3.
25
Tuner setting
This DVD/VCR is equipped with a channel memory feature which allows channels to skip up or down to the next channel set into memory, skipping over unwanted channels. Before selecting channels, they must be programmed into the DVD/VCR’s memory. In addition to normal
VHF and UHF channels, this DVD/VCR can receive up to 113 Cable
TV channels. To use this DVD/VCR with an antenna, set the TV/CABLE menu option to the TV mode. When shipped from the factory, this menu option is in the CABLE mode.
TV/CABLE selection
VCR DVD
VCR MENU
ENTER
SET +/–
Setting channels automatically
Preparation:
• Turn ON the TV and select to the corresponding video input.
• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.
(The VCR indicator will light.)
1
Press VCR MENU. Press SET + or – to select
“CH SETUP”, then press ENTER.
MENU
AUTO REPEAT
SAP
CH SETUP
SYSTEM SETUP
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
1
Repeat left step 1 and press SET + or – to select “AUTO CH MEMORY”.
CH SETUP
TV CABLE
ADD/DELETE
〈 +/-/ENTER/MENU 〉
2 Press ENTER.
Auto tuning will begin. The channel display will count up and when finished, the screen returns to normal.
CH 002
2
Press SET + or – to select “TV/CABLE”.
CH SETUP
CABLE
ADD/DELETE
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
3 Press ENTER to select the TV or CABLE mode.
The arrow indicates the selected mode.
CH SETUP
TV CABLE
AUTO CH MEMORY
ADD/DELETE
TV - VHF/UHF channels
CABLE - Cable TV channels
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
4 Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is cleared.
Note:
You can’t select “CH SETUP” if you set the channel to “L1” or
“L2”.
27
Basic setup (VCR)
Tuner setting (continued)
VCR MENU
ENTER
SET +/–
0–9
To ADD/DELETE channels
ADD CH 003
Noise elimination
1
Repeat the step 1 on page 27. Then press SET + or
– to select the “ADD/DELETE” and press ENTER.
CH SETUP
TV CABLE
AUTO CH MEMORY
ADD/DELETE
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
When you don't want to receive a weak signal broadcast, a Blue back screen can be obtained by selecting the NO NOISE BACK-
GROUND “ON”. When the unit is shipped from the factory, the
NO NOISE BACKGROUND is set to “ON”.
1 Repeat the steps 1~2 on page 26 and press SET
+ or – to select “NO NOISE BACKGROUND”.
SYSTEM SETUP
CLOCK SET
LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/LANGUE
NO NOISE BACKGROUND
ON OFF
ON OFF
AUTO CLOCK
STANDARD TIME
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME
〈 +/-/ENTER/MENU 〉
2
To Add or Delete desired channels
1) Press Direct channel selection buttons (0–9) or SET +/– to select a channel number you want to add or delete.
2) To add channels
Press ENTER until “ADD” appears on the screen.
To delete channels
Press ENTER until “DELETE” appears on the screen. The channel number will blink
3) Repeat 1) to 2) to add or delete other channel.
2 Press ENTER to select “ON” or “OFF” position.
SYSTEM SETUP
CLOCK SET
LANGUAGE/IDIOMA/LANGUE
NO NOISE BACKGROUND
ON OFF
ON OFF
AUTO CLOCK
STANDARD TIME
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME
〈 +/-/ENTER/MENU 〉
3 Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is cleared.
+/Ð/0Ð9/ENTER/MENU
3
Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is cleared.
28
Playback (VCR)
Cassette tape playback
To play a prerecorded tape.
VCR DVD
STOP
PLAY
FF
REW
Playback
Preparation:
• Turn ON the TV and select the corresponding video input.
• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.
(The VCR indicator will light.)
1 Load a prerecorded tape
(When loading a cassette tape without the erase prevention tab, playback will start automatically.)
Rewind or forward the tape
Stop the playback or recording via STOP on remote.
To rewind the tape:
Press REW.
To forward the tape:
Press FF.
2 To start playback
Press PLAY.
Playback will start. “ ” will appear on the screen for about 4 seconds.
To stop playback
Press STOP once.
The tape will stop but remain fully loaded and ready to play.
“ ” will appear on the screen for about 4 seconds.
To discontinue the tape-winding, press STOP. To switch to playback directly (without STOP), press PLAY.
Forward/Reverse picture search mode
When the tape is being winded, you can switch to picture search mode (see next page). To do this, press REW or
FF and hold it down. The unit will resume the tape advance or rewinding as soon as the button is released.
Notes:
• This VCR selects the playback tape speed SP, LP or SLP automatically.
• The Cassette tape and DVD disc can be played back simultaneously. If you press VCR DVD selector, the tape playback and DVD playback alternate with each other on the screen
(via CH3, 4 or video connection).
30
Playback (VCR)
Loading and unloading a cassette tape
Use only video cassette tapes marked .
EJECT
Loading
Push the center of the tape until it is automatically inserted.
Insert the cassette tape with its labeled side facing up and the erase prevention tab positioned at your left. An inverted cassette tape cannot be inserted.
Erase prevention tab
Automatic power ON
When you insert a cassette tape the DVD/VCR power will turn ON automatically.
Automatic playback
When loading a cassette tape without an erase prevention tab, playback will start automatically.
Unloading
1
Press EJECT on the front panel or on the remote.
2
Remove the cassette tape.
or
Automatic tape eject
This DVD/VCR will automatically rewind the tape when the tape has ended. Once the tape is rewound to its beginning, the cassette tape will be ejected automatically.
To prevent accidental erasure
To prevent accidental erasure
Remove the erase prevention tab with a screwdriver.
Screwdriver
To record again
Cover the hole with a piece of adhesive tape.
Erase prevention tab
Tape speed and maximum recording time
Tape Speed
SP (Standard Play)
SLP (Super Long Play)
T-160
2-2/3 hours
8 hours
Adhesive tape
T-120
2 hours
6 hours
Video cassette tape
T-90
1-1/2 hours
4-1/2 hours
T-60
1 hour
3 hours
T-30
30 minutes
1-1/2 hours
29
Special playback
CM SKIP
SLOW
SET +/–
PAUSE/STEP
PLAY
FF
REW
ATR
Picture search
Reverse picture search function
Press REW once or twice during playback.
Forward picture search function
Press FF once or twice during playback.
To return to playback, press PLAY.
SPEED SEARCH TIMES
TAPE SPEED
SP (Standard Play)
LP (Long Play)
SLP (Super Long Play)
PICTURE SEARCH SPEED
PRESS ONCE PRESS TWICE
3 X
7 X
9 X
5 X
9 X
15 X
Adjusting tracking condition
Automatic tracking adjustment
Whenever you insert a tape and start playback, the automatic tracking feature continuously analyzes the signal to enable optimum picture quality during playback.
Manual tracking adjustment
If automatic tracking cannot eliminate noises well during playback, press SET +/– to eliminate the noise. “MANUAL
TR.” will appear on the screen. Press it briefly for a fine adjustment, or press and hold for a coarse adjustment.
Press ATR to reactivate automatic tracking again.
“AUTO TR.” will appear on the screen.
Still picture
Press PAUSE/STEP during playback.
To resume normal playback, press PLAY or PAUSE/STEP.
Slow motion
Frame by frame picture
CM skip
Video head cleaning
AUTO TR.
During playback press SLOW.
To return to playback, press PLAY or SLOW.
Slow tracking and vertical lock adjustment
If noise bars appear in the picture during slow motion, press the SET + /– to reduce the noise bars.
If the still picture jitters excessively, press SET +/– to stabilize the still picture.
Notes:
• The audio output is muted during PICTURE SEARCH, STILL,
FRAME ADVANCE and SLOW MOTION.
• During picture search mode there will be noise bars. This is not a defect.
• Playback will commence after approx. 5 minutes to protect the video tape against excessive wear during pause mode.
Press PAUSE/STEP during playback.
Press SLOW repeatedly: The picture advances frame by frame.
To return to playback, press PLAY or PAUSE/STEP.
Video head clogging
The video heads are the means by which the DVD/VCR reads the picture from the tape during playback. In the unlikely event that the heads become dirty enough to be clogged, no picture will be displayed. This can easily be determined if, during playback of a known good tape, there is good sound, but no picture
(picture is extremely snowy). If this is the case, have the DVD/VCR checked and cleaned by qualified service personnel.
Good Picture
Press CM SKIP during playback. The DVD/VCR will search forward through approximately 30 seconds of the tape (e.g.
unwanted commercial time) for each press of CM SKIP
(maximum six presses) and then resume normal playback.
For example : 1 press: 30 seconds of tape
2 press: 60 seconds of tape
3 press: 90 seconds of tape
Snowy Picture
Notes:
• DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CLEAN THE VIDEO HEADS OR
SERVICE THE UNIT BY REMOVING THE REAR COVER.
• Video heads may eventually wear out and should be replaced when they fail to produce clear pictures.
• To help prevent video head clogging, use only good quality
VHS tapes. Discard worn out tapes.
31
Playback (VCR)
Convenience function
CLOCK/COUNTER
VCR MENU
SET +/–
ENTER
STOP
PLAY
CALL
ZERO RETURN
COUNTER RESET
Repeat playback Zero return function
The entire video tape will play until its end. The tape will automatically rewind to the beginning and the playback will be repeated.
This function rewinds the tape to the “00:00:00” counter position automatically.
1
Press VCR MENU.
Press SET + or – to select “AUTO
REPEAT”.
MENU
TIMER REC SET
AUTO REPEAT
CH SETUP
SYSTEM SETUP
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
1
Press CLOCK/COUNTER.
The counter display shows the tape running time during playback or recording.
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
2
Press ENTER to select “ON” or “OFF”.
If “ON” is selected, the playback will be repeated endlessly.
MENU
TIMER REC SET
AUTO REPEAT
CH SETUP
SYSTEM SETUP
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
2 Press COUNTER RESET at the desired tape position.
The counter display will be reset to
“00:00:00” position (e.g. the beginning of recording).
3
Press VCR MENU until the menu screen is cleared.
If you press CALL, “ ” will appear on the screen
11
.
3
Press STOP when playback or recording is completed.
Press ZERO RETURN.
The tape will automatically rewind or fast forward to the “00:00:00” counter position.
4 To commence playback, press PLAY.
The playback will be repeated endlessly.
To cancel repeat mode:
Follow the above step 1, then press ENTER to select
“OFF” position. Press VCR MENU to return to the TV.
32
Recording (VCR)
Recording a TV program
Recording and viewing the same TV program.
VCR DVD
CH +/–
34
REC/OTR
SP/SLP
0–9
Recording a TV program
Preparation:
• Turn ON the TV and select to the corresponding video input.
• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.
(The VCR indicator will light.)
4 Press Number buttons or CH +/– to select the channel to be recorded.
CH 110
1 Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention tab intact.
The DVD/VCR will automatically turn on.
2
3
Press SP/SLP to select the desired tape speed
SP or SLP.
The tape counter and “SP” or “SLP” will appear on the screen for about 4 seconds.
00 : 00 : 00 SP
Select “TV” or “CABLE” to the appropriate position
27
.
TV - VHF/UHF channels
CABLE - Cable TV channels
TV mode direct channel selection:
All channels can be instantly selected by using two buttons. (for example, to select channel 2, press “0”, then
“2”. If you press only “2”, channel selection will be delayed for two seconds.) For channels 10 and above, press the 2 digits in order.
CABLE mode direct channel selection:
1-9 Press 0 twice and then 1-9 as required.
10-12
Example: To select “2”, Press 002.
Press 0 first and then the remaining 2 digits in order from left to right.
13-99
Example: Press 012 for “12”.
Press 2 digits in order.
Example: Press 22 for “22”.
100-125 Press the 3 digits in order.
Example: Press 110 for “110”.
VHF/UHF/CABLE TV CHANNELS
TV
VHF
2-13
UHF
14-69
CABLE TV
VHF
2-13
STD/HRC/IRC
14-36 (A) (W)
37-59 (AA) (WW)
60-85 (AAA) (ZZZ)
86-94 (86) (94)
95-99 (A-5) (A-1)
100-125 (100)(125)
01 (5A)
5
Press REC/OTR.
“ ” will appear on the screen
for about 4 seconds and “REC” will
appear on the display window.
CH 110
INDEX
VCR DVD
CLOCK/COUNTER
STOP
INDEX +/–
Clock/counter display
Press CLOCK/COUNTER. The clock and tape counter alternate with each other in the display window.
COUNTER
Video index search system
This function enables you to locate the beginning of any recording made on the VCR.
Recording an INDEX mark
The Index Search function automatically records an INDEX mark on the tape whenever a recording is initiated.
INDEX
CH 001
CLOCK
Press VCR DVD selector. The DVD mode and the
VCR mode alternate with each other in the display.
DVD mode
Index search
Press INDEX + or – during stop or play mode.
For Succeeding programs: Press INDEX +.
For Preceding programs: Press INDEX –.
(As many as 9 index points can be accessed via this method.)
When the INDEX + or – is pressed, the unit starts searching the INDEX
NO. selected and finds the portion, then playback starts automatically.
To stop the Index Search, press
STOP.
or is displayed
INDEX NO. (up to 9)
VCR mode
Notes:
• If you rewind the tape beyond “00:00:00”, a minus sign (“–”) will be displayed in front of the time.
• When you load a tape, the counter will reset to “00:00:00”.
• The counter does not function on nonrecorded (blank) sections of the tape. When you rewind, fast forward or play tapes through blank sections, the counter stops.
Notes:
• When you record an INDEX mark at the very beginning of the tape, the mark may not be found.
• During INDEX search, the tape may stop and begin to play at a slightly different location.
• INDEX may not function properly with old or worn out video tapes.
• INDEX marks may not be found if it is extremely close to the point where the search began.
• In recording, if you stop recording temporarily, the INDEX mark is not recorded on the tape.
SQPB (S-VHS Quasi Playback)
You can playback video cassette tapes recorded in the
S-VHS system.
However, the picture will not have the high resolution of
S-VHS system.
Note: You cannot record S-VHS video format with this VCR.
33
TV/VCR
PAUSE/STEP
STOP
To stop recording
Press STOP to stop recording.
“ ” will appear on screen for about
4 seconds.
Auto Rewind feature
This VCR will automatically rewind the tape when the tape has ended (except during OTR and timer recording). It will also eject the tape.
To stop recording temporarily
Press PAUSE/STEP to avoid recording unwanted material. Press again to continue the recording.
“ ” will appear on screen for
about 4 seconds.
Notes:
• The pause function will be released after 5 minutes to prevent damage to the tape or the VCR. The VCR will change to the
STOP mode.
• You can select a recording channel in the recording pause mode.
Recording one program while watching another
While the VCR is recording, select your desired channel on the TV.
When a TV is connected with an antenna cable only, press TV/VCR to select the TV position.
The “VCR” display will go off and recording will continue.
Select the TV channel you want to watch by using the
TV channel selector.
Note:
Some Cable TV hookups do not permit viewing one channel while recording another. See pages
16
and
17
.
35
Recording (VCR)
One-touch Timer Recording (OTR)
The One-touch Timer Recording feature provides a simple and convenient way to make a timed recording.
VCR DVD
CH +/–
STOP
REC/OTR
SP/SLP
0–9
One-touch Timer Recording (OTR)
Preparation:
• Turn ON the TV and select to the corresponding video input.
• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.
(The VCR indicator will light.)
Example: One-touch Timer Recording for 30 minutes.
1 Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention tab intact.
The VCR will automatically turn on.
2 Press SP/SLP to select the desired tape speed
SP or SLP.
The tape counter and “SP” or “SLP” will appear on the screen for about 4 seconds.
4 Press Direct channel selection buttons (0–9) or
CH +/– to select the channel to be recorded.
CH 110
5 Press REC/OTR. Recording begins. Press the button again to stop recording after 30 minutes.
Each additional press of REC/OTR will increase recording time as shown in the chart below, up to a maximum of 6 hours.
The OTR and recording time will appear on the screen for about 4 seconds. And, “ ” will appear on the display.
Press once twice
3 times
4 times
5 times
Recording time Press
NORMAL REC
0:30
6 times
7 times
1:00
1:30
2:00
8 times
9 times
10 times
Recording time
3:00
4:00
5:00
6:00
NORMAL REC
OTR 0 : 30
CH 110
00 : 00 : 00 SP
INDEX
3 Set “TV” or “CABLE” option to the appropriate position
27
.
TV - VHF/UHF channels
CABLE - Cable TV channels
To cancel OTR
Press STOP or turn off the power.
“ ” will appear on screen for about 4 seconds.
Note:
If you wish to watch the DVD playback during OTR or standard recording, press VCR DVD selector to change to DVD mode and perform the DVD playback
42
.
36
Recording (VCR)
Timer recording (continued)
VCR DVD
VCR MENU
SET +/–
ENTER
CANCEL
TIMER REC
To confirm or cancel a program
Weekly (e.g. WKL-TU: each Tuesday) or daily (e.g. MO-
SA: Monday to Saturday) Timer recording
Follow the procedure of timer recording on the previous page. At step 3 press SET + or – repeatedly until the desired setting appears. Then press ENTER.
When you press SET – repeatedly, the
DATE indicator will change as follows, in this case the day is Friday.
The current day (Friday) SU-SA (Sunday to Saturday)
1
If the Timer has been activated, press TIMER
REC to deactivate the Timer.
The timer symbol ( ) will disappear. Then press VCR DVD selector to change to VCR mode.
One month later minus one day
WKL-WE
(Weekly Wednesday)
MO-SA (Monday to Saturday)
MO-FR (Monday to Friday)
WKL-TH (Weekly Thursday)
DATE
WKL-WE
START END CH
2 To confirm Timer program:
At step 1 on the previous page select “TIMER REC
SET” and press ENTER.
The timer program list will appear on the screen.
DATE
26(SA)
START END CH
11:00PM 11:30PM125SLP
〈 +/Ð/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU 〉
〈
+/—/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU
〉
If the programs overlap another 3 To cancel Timer program:
Press SET + or – to select the unwanted program, then press CANCEL to cancel the program.
Do not overlap timer programs as portions of the conflicting programs will be lost. The first recording time has priority over the next recording time as shown in the diagram below.
8 : 00 9 : 00
10 : 00 11 : 00
Program 1
Program 2
Deleted Parts
Program 3
Recording
Control Settings
Prog.1
Non Recorded Portion Parts
Prog.2
Prog.3
4
〈
DATE START END
Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð
CH
Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð
Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð
Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð
Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð
Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð
Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð
Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð
Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð
Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð
Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð
Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð
+/Ð/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU 〉
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Press VCR MENU repeatedly until the menu screen is cleared.
Notes:
• The daily/weekly recording can be made continuously until the recording is canceled or the tape reaches the end.
• During timer recording the automatic rewinding mechanism does not function.
Notes:
• If there are other timer record programs remaining, TIMER
REC must be pressed to reactivate the timer, otherwise the remaining timer record programs will be ignored.
• You cannot confirm the Timer program during timer recording operation.
• You can correct or cancel a programmed setting in program confirm mode.
38
Timer recording
Timer recording can be programmed on-screen with the remote control.
The built-in timer allows automatic unattended recording of up to 8 programs within 1 month.
VCR DVD
EJECT
VCR MENU
SET +/–
ENTER
CANCEL
TIMER REC
Timer recording
Preparation:
• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.
• Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention tab intact.
• Check the time and date are correct
24
.
Example: Program a timer recording for the 26th day, channel 125 (Cable TV), 11:00 - 11:30 PM on timer program number 1 (Tape speed: SLP).
1
Press VCR MENU. Select “TIMER REC SET”, then press ENTER.
MENU
TIMER REC SET
AUTO REPEAT
SAP
SYSTEM SETUP
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
5 To enter other programs, repeat steps 2 through 4.
• To return to the normal screen, press VCR MENU twice.
DATE START END CH
26(SA) 11:00PM 11:30PM125 SLP
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
〈
+/—/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU
〉
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
2
3
Press SET + or – to select one of the program line, then press ENTER.
DATE START END
Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð
Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð
CH
Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð
Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð
Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð
Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð
Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð
Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð : Ð Ð
Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð
Ð : Ð Ð Ð Ð Ð
〈 +/Ð/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU 〉
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Press SET + or – to select the date, then press
ENTER.
DATE
26(SA)
START END CH
— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
〈
+/—/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU
〉
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
4
Set the start time, end time, channel and tape speed as in step 3.
DATE START END CH
26(SA) 11:00PM 11:30PM125 SLP
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
— — — — — —— : — — — : — — — ——
〈
+/—/ENTER/CANCEL/MENU
〉
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Notes:
• Press CANCEL to move cursor backward for correction.
• To record from external source set the channel to “L1” or
“L2”.
6 Press TIMER REC. The timer symbol ( ) will appear on the display and the VCR stands by for recording.
At the same time, VCR mode will change to DVD mode automatically.
You can use DVD even if the VCR is in the timer recording mode.
If you do not use the DVD, turn the power off.
Notes:
• The timer recording will start at 5 seconds before the time you predetermined.
• If the timer symbol ( ) does not appear on the display in spite of the pressing of TIMER REC, the cassette may not have been loaded
29
.
• If the cassette is ejected in spite of the pressing of TIMER
REC, the erase prevention tab of the cassette may have been removed
29
.
Notes:
• If the timer symbol ( ) blinks when the timer recording ended, the TV program has not been completely recorded because of an insufficient tape length. Press TIMER REC to cancel the timer program or press EJECT to remove the cassette tape.
• During timer recording standby mode, the VCR mode cannot be operated. To use the VCR, press TIMER REC at first, then press
VCR DVD selector to change to VCR mode. After you use the
VCR, press TIMER REC again to put the VCR into timer recording standby mode.
• If you press TIMER REC during timer recording, the recording operation will be interrupted. If you press TIMER REC again within the programmed time, the recording operation will start again.
• After a power failure or disconnection of the power plug, all programmed recording settings and time display will be lost upon resumption of power. In this case, reset the clock
24
and reprogram any timer recording.
37
Other functions (VCR)
Stereo recording and playback /
Second Audio Program (SAP)
VCR MENU
ENTER
SET +/–
AUDIO SELECT
Stereo recording and playback
The VHS Hi-Fi audio system permits high fidelity recording of MTS STEREO TV broadcasts.
When a MTS STEREO broadcast is received, “STEREO” will appear on the screen for about 4 seconds and the program can be viewed or recorded in stereo.
The Hi-Fi stereo recording procedure is the same as for normal recordings.
STEREO
Note:
When using a Cable TV system, stereo TV programs may be transmitted over a mono cable channel. In this case
“STEREO” will not appear and the sound will be in mono.
Second Audio Program (SAP)
Your DVD/VCR is fitted with a SAP broadcast system which enables you to switch to a second audio program when viewing a selected channel.
This function applies only when the program is broadcast in multi-languages through the SAP broadcast system.
1 Press VCR MENU. Then press SET + or – to select “SAP”.
MENU
AUTO REPEAT
SAP
CH SETUP
SYSTEM SETUP
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
Output selection
When viewing an MTS stereo TV program, or playing a prerecorded VHS Hi-Fi stereo videotape, press AUDIO
SELECT to select how the audio will be heard through the speakers. Normally set to the Hi-Fi stereo position, this button can be set to the MONO position if the stereo broadcast or videotape audio is of poor quality. The “R” and “L” positions allow the audio from the Right or Left Hi-
Fi channel to be heard over both TV speakers. This button has no effect when viewing a MONO videotape or
TV program. Each time when you press the button,
OUTPUT SELECTION display appears on the screen for several seconds. Refer to the chart below.
OUTPUT
SELECTION
STEREO
L ch
R ch
MONO
SOUND HEARD ON BOTH
SPEAKERS
STEREO
LEFT CHANNEL AUDIO
RIGHT CHANNEL AUDIO
MONO
2 Press ENTER to select “ON”.
Then press VCR MENU until the menu screen is cleared.
MENU
AUTO REPEAT
SAP
CH SETUP
SYSTEM SETUP
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
+/Ð/ENTER/MENU
Listening to SAP
When the VCR is turned on or a channel selection is made, make certain the letters “SAP” appears on the screen for about 4 seconds. This means that the “Second
Audio Program” broadcasting is available.
STEREO SAP SAP
OR
Notes:
• When playing back a tape that is not recorded in Hi-Fi stereo mode, the audio will automatically be monaural.
• When listening to a VHS Hi-Fi video tape or MTS broadcast through the VHF/UHF jack (Audio/Video cable not connected), the sound will be monaural.
39
Other functions (VCR)
Duplicating a video tape
If you connect the DVD/VCR to another VCR or Camcorder, you can duplicate
a previously recorded tape. Make all connections before turning on the power.
VCR DVD
INPUT SELECT
STOP
SP/SLP
REC/OTR
Duplicating a video tape
Preparation:
• Turn ON the TV and select the corresponding video input.
• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.
(The VCR indicator will light.)
• Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention tab intact.
• Load a previously recorded tape into the playback
VCR or Camcorder.
1 Press SP/SLP to select the desired tape speed
SP or SLP.
It is recommended that you set the
tape speed to the SP mode on the
recording VCR for best results.
2
Press INPUT SELECT once or twice to select
AUDIO/VIDEO input position.
“L1” or “L2” will appear in the display.
Connection with second VCR
Playback VCR
To VIDEO OUT To AUDIO (R) OUT
To AUDIO (L) OUT
AUDIO/VIDEO cable (supplied)
Recording VCR
To VIDEO IN To AUDIO (R) IN
To AUDIO (L) IN
L1: on the rear panel
L2: on the front panel
3 Press PLAY on the playback VCR or Camcorder.
Connection with Camcorder
Playback Camcorder
To AV Jack
4 Press REC/OTR on the recording VCR.
The duplicating process begins.
Recording VCR
5 Press STOP after duplicating a video tape.
To VIDEO IN
To AUDIO (R) IN
To AUDIO (L) IN
AUDIO/VIDEO cable (not supplied)
For duplicating a previously recorded tape from a camcorder, follow the camcorder manufacturer’s instructions. A typical camcorder dubbing hookup is shown above.
40
Basic playback (DVD)
Playing a disc
This section shows you the basics on how to play a disc.
CAUTION
Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray as it is closing.
Neglecting to do so may cause serious personal injury.
ON/STANDBY
VCR/DVD SELECT Disc tray
STOP
Display window PLAY
OPEN/CLOSE
DVD
VCD
CD
Basic playback
Preparations:
• When you want to view a disc, turn on the TV and select the corresponding video input connected to the DVD. This may include S-video or component video inputs which are exclusive to DVD playback.
• When you want to enjoy the sound of discs from the audio system, turn on the audio system and select the input connected to the DVD/VCR.
1
2
Press ON/STANDBY.
The DVD/VCR turns on.
Press VCR/DVD SELECT to select the DVD mode.
The DVD indicator will light.
5
Press OPEN/CLOSE or PLAY on the unit or remote control.
OR
The disc tray closes automatically.
On the TV-screen, “ ” changes to
“Reading” and then playback commences.
• A menu screen will appear on the TV screen, if the disc has a menu feature.
Reading
3
Press OPEN/CLOSE.
The disc tray opens.
6
Press / or / to select title.
42
4
Place the disc on the disc tray.
With the playback side down
7 Press ENTER.
• Title is selected and play commences.
• There are two different disc sizes. Place the disc in the correct guide on the disc tray. If the disc is out of the guide, it may damage the disc and cause the DVD/VCR to malfunction.
• Do not place a disc which is unplayable in this
DVD/VCR.
8
Press STOP to end playback.
• The unit records the stopped point, depending on the disc. “ ” appears on the screen. Press
PLAY to resume playback (from the scene point).
• If you press STOP again or unload the disc (“ ” appears on the screen.), the unit will clear the stopped point.
To start playback in the stop mode
Press PLAY.
VCR DVD
Recording a DVD/CD disc
You can record disc material in DVD, Audio CD, etc. onto a Video tape with this DVD/VCR.
STOP
PLAY
SP/SLP
REC/OTR
Duplicating a DVD or CD disc
Preparation:
• Turn ON the TV and select the corresponding video input.
• Press VCR DVD selector to select the VCR mode.
(The VCR indicator will light.)
• Load a cassette tape with the erase prevention tab intact.
• Load a DVD/CD disc.
1
Press SP/SLP to select the desired tape speed
SP or SLP.
Notes:
• You may not be able to record the beginning of the disc.
Begin VCR recording once program playback commences on the DVD.
• When the scanning mode is set to the progressive mode, you cannot duplicate a disc material onto a video tape.
When REC/OTR is pressed, the PROGRESSIVE indicator
“ ” on the display window will flash and “Please Set
Off” will appear on the screen.
• You cannot record discs encoded with copy guard function. The following icon and text will show up on the
TV screen.
00 : 00 : 00 SP
DISC IS COPY PROTECTED
2
Press VCR DVD selector to select the DVD mode.
The DVD indicator will light.
3 Press PLAY to start playback.
4 Press REC/OTR to start recording.
The DVD/VCR will change to the
VCR mode automatically and the playback picture or sound will be duplicated on the video cassette tape.
5 Press STOP if you finish recording.
If you wish to stop a DVD/CD disc, press VCR DVD selector to change the DVD mode, then press STOP.
41
VCR DVD
POWER
OPEN/CLOSE
C
/
D
/
B
ENTER
STOP
/
A
PLAY
PAUSE/STEP
To obtain a higher quality picture
Occasionally, some picture noise not usually visible during a normal broadcast may appear on the TV screen while playing a DVD video disc because the high resolution pictures on these discs include a lot of information. While the amount of noise depends on the TV you use with this unit, you should generally reduce the sharpness adjustment on your TV when viewing DVD video discs.
About DVD VCD CD
The
DVD VCD CD
icons on the heading bar show the playable discs for the function described under that heading.
DVD
: You can use this function with DVD video discs.
CD
: You can use this function with Video CDs.
: You can use this function with Audio CDs and CD-R/RW CDs.
To pause playback (still mode)
Press PAUSE/STEP during playback.
To stop playback
Press STOP.
To resume normal playback, press
PLAY.
• The sound is muted during still mode.
To remove the disc
Press OPEN/CLOSE.
Remove the disc after the disc tray opens completely.
Playing a Disc while the VCR section is recording or standing by for timer recording
1) Start to record.
Follow steps 1~5 on page 34.
• If the DVD/VCR is standing by for recording, turn on the DVD/VCR.
2) Press VCR DVD selector to select DVD mode.
3) Play a disc.
Follow steps 3 ~ 5 on page 42.
• Press PLAY if the DVD/VCR does not start to play a disc automatically.
4) Stop to play.
Press STOP to stop play back a disc.
Screen saver function
The screen saver operates when you leave the unit in
DVD stop mode for approx. five minutes.
The screen will repeatedly get dark gradually and back to normal.
Be sure to press OPEN/CLOSE to close the disc tray after you remove the disc.
Notes:
• If a non-compatible disc is loaded, “Incorrect Disc”, “Region Code Error” or “Parental Error” will appear on the TV screen according to the type of loaded disc. In this case, check your disc again
• Some discs may take a minute or so to start playback.
8
59
.
• When you set a single-faced disc label downwards (i.e. the wrong way up) and press OPEN/CLOSE or PLAY on the unit,
“Reading” will appear on the display for a few minutes and then “Incorrect Disc” will continue to be displayed.
• Some discs may not work the resuming facility.
• Resuming cannot function when you play a PBC-featured Video CD while the PBC is on. To turn off the PBC
51
.
• Some playback operations of DVDs may be intentionally fixed by software producers. Since this unit plays DVDs according to the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also refer to the instructions supplied with the DVDs.
• Do not move the unit during playback. Doing so may damage the disc.
• Use the OPEN/CLOSE to open and close the disc tray. Do not push the disc tray while it is moving. Doing so may cause the unit to malfunction.
• Do not push up on the disc tray or put any objects other than discs on the disc tray. Doing so may cause the unit to malfunction.
• In many instances, a menu screen will appear after playback of a movie is completed. Prolonged display of an on-screen menu may damage your television set, permanently etching that image onto its screen. To avoid this, be sure to press
POWER on your remote control once the movie is completed.
• There may be a slight delay between you pressing the button and the function activating.
43
Basic playback (DVD)
Playing a disc (continued)
You can play discs at various speeds.
SLOW
PAUSE/STEP
PLAY
FF
REW
SKIP
/
DVD
VCD
CD
Playing in fast reverse or fast forward directions
Press REW or FF during playback.
To resume normal playback
Press PLAY.
REW: Fast reverse playback
FF: Fast forward playback
Each time you press REW or FF, the playback speed changes.
Notes:
• The DVD/VCR mutes sound and subtitles during reverse and forward scan of DVD/VCD video discs. However, this unit plays sound during fast forward or fast reverse play of audio CDs.
• The playback speed may differ depending on the disc.
DVD
VCD
Playing frame by frame
Press PAUSE/STEP during still playback.
Each time you press PAUSE/STEP, the picture advances one frame.
To resume normal playback
Press PLAY.
Note:
The sound is muted during frame by frame playback.
DVD
VCD
Playing in slow-motion
Press SLOW ( ) during playback.
To resume normal playback
Press PLAY.
Each time you press the button, the slow-motion speed changes.
Note:
The sound is muted during slow-motion playback.
DVD
VCD
CD
Locating a chapter or track
Press SKIP or repeatedly to display the chapter or track number you want.
Playback starts from the selected chapter or track.
To locate succeeding chapters or tracks.
Playback starts from the beginning of the current chapter or track.
When you press twice in quick successions, playback starts from the beginning of the preceding chapter or track.
Notes:
• A “Prohibition” symbol may appear at the upper left of the screen. This symbol means either the feature you tried is not available on the disc, or the DVD/VCR cannot access the feature at this time. This does not indicate a problem with the DVD/
VCR.
• The unit is capable of holding a still video image or On screen display image on your television screen indefinitely. If you leave the still video image or On screen display image displayed on your TV for an extended period of time, you risk permanent damage to your television screen. Projection televisions are very susceptible.
44
Advanced playback (DVD)
Marking desired scenes
The unit stores the points that you want to watch again up to 3 points.
You can resume playback from each scene.
C
/
D
ENTER
CLEAR
DVD
VCD
Marking the scenes
1 Press MARKER during playback.
Marker
Marker
1
2
Marker 3
/Enter/Clear/Marker
2 Select the blank Marker using
C
or
D
.
Then press ENTER at the desired scene.
• Repeat this procedure to set the other 2 scenes.
Marker
Marker
1
2
00
Marker 3
/Enter/Clear/Marker
27 54
3 Press MARKER to remove this display.
3
Press ENTER.
MARKER
DVD
VCD
Returning to the scenes
1
Press MARKER during playback or stop mode.
Marker
Marker
1
2
00
01
Marker 3 02
/Enter/Clear/Marker
27
16
08
54
25
31
2 Press
C
or
D
to select the Marker 1-3.
Marker
Marker
1
2
00
01
Marker 3 02
/Enter/Clear/Marker
27
16
08
54
25
31
Playback starts from the marked scene.
Notes:
•
•
•
Some discs may not work with the marking operation.
The marking is canceled when you open the disc tray or turn the power off.
Some subtitles recorded around the marker may fail to appear.
To cancel the Marker
Follow the above steps 1~2, then press CLEAR.
46
Advanced playback (DVD)
Zooming/Locating desired scene
ZOOM
C
/
D
/
B
/
A
ENTER
CLEAR
DISPLAY
0–9
SEARCH
DVD
VCD
CD
Zooming
This unit will allow you to zoom in on the frame image. You can then make selections by switching the position of the frame.
1 Press ZOOM during playback.
The center part of the image will be zoomed in.
Each press of ZOOM will change the
ZOOM 1 (x 1.3), 2 (x 1.5) and 3
(x 2.0).
2
Press
C
/
D
/
B
/ frame.
to view a different part of the
You may move the frame from the centre position to UP, DOWN, LEFT or
RIGHT direction.
1
3 In the zoom mode press ZOOM repeatedly to return to a 1:1 view ( Off).
Notes:
• You can select the Pause, Slow or Search playback in the zoom mode.
• Some discs may not respond to zoom feature.
DVD
VCD
CD
Locating desired scene
Use the title, chapter and time recorded on the DVD disc to locate the desired point to play back. In the case of VCD/CD discs, time and track are used to locate the desired point to play back. To check the title, chapter and time, press DISPLAY.
1 Press SEARCH during playback or stop mode.
Time
Title
/
/6
Chapter
/Enter/0 9/Clear/Search
/
3 Press Number buttons (0–9) to change the number.
Time
Title
/
/6
Chapter 12
/Enter/0 9/Clear/Search
/
• “Time” only works in playback or resume stop mode.
2 Press or
“Chapter”.
D
to select the “Time”, “Title” or
Time
Title
/
/6
Chapter
/Enter/0 9/Clear/Search
/
• If you input a wrong number, press
CLEAR.
• Refer to the package supplied with the disc to check the numbers.
4
Press ENTER. Playback starts.
• When you change the title, playback starts from Chapter 1 of the selected title.
• Some discs may not work in the above operation.
Note:
In case of the Video-CD playback with PBC, the SEARCH does not work. To turn off PBC
51
.
45
Repeat playback/A-B Repeat playback
D
/
B
/
A
PLAY
A-B RPT
PLAY MODE
DVD
VCD
CD
Repeat playback
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop mode.
2 [DVD]
Press
B
/
A
to select “Chapter” or “Title”.
DVD
VCD
CD
A-B Repeat playback
A-B repeat playback allows you to repeat material between two selected points.
1 Press A-B RPT during playback.
The start point is selected.
A
Repeat
/Play Mode
Off
The unit automatically starts repeat playback after finishing the current title or chapter.
[Audio CD, Video CD, MP3/WMA CD]
Press
Press
D
B
to select “Repeat”.
/
A
to select “Track” or “All”.
2 Press A-B RPT again.
The end point is selected. Playback starts at the point that you selected.
Playback stops at the end point, returns to Point A automatically, then starts again.
A B
Play Mode
Repeat
/Play Mode
Off
Off
The unit automatically starts repeat playback after finishing the current track.
• If you set the repeat mode during stop mode, press PLAY to start Repeat playback.
To resume normal playback
Press A-B RPT again.
“ Off ” appears on the screen.
3
Press PLAY MODE again to make the screen disappear.
To resume normal playback
Select Repeat : “Off” in step 2.
Notes:
• Some discs may not work with the repeat operation.
• In case of Video CD with PBC, repeat functions are prohibited during playback.
Notes:
• In A-B Repeat mode, subtitles near the A or B locations may not be displayed.
• You cannot set the A-B Repeat for the scenes that include multiple angles.
• A-B Repeat playback does not work when Repeat playback is activated.
• You may not be able to set A-B Repeat, during certain scenes of the DVD.
• A-B Repeat does not work with an interactive DVD, MP3/WMA/
JPEG CD.
• A-B Repeat is prohibited when PBC is on.
47
Advanced playback (DVD)
Program playback/Random playback
You can arrange the playback order of tracks or files on the disc. And also the unit selects tracks or files at random and playback them.
These feature works for Audio CD, Video CD and MP3/WMA/JPEG
CD.
C
/
D
/
B
/
ENTER
CLEAR
A
PLAY
SKIP
PLAY MODE
0–9
48
VCD
CD
Program playback
1
2
Press PLAY MODE during stop mode.
Play Mode
Repeat
/Play Mode
Off
Off
Press
B
/
C
/
D
to select Play Mode, then press
A
to select “Program”.
Play Mode
Repeat
1
2
3
Clear
:
: Program
Off
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
9 12
Program Playback
/Enter/0 9/Clear/Play Mode
3 Press
C
/ or
B
/
A
to select the programming position. Use Number buttons (0–9) to input the track or file numbers.
• To program others, repeat step 3.
• If you input a wrong number, press
CLEAR.
Play Mode
Repeat
1 9
2 3
3 11
Clear
4
5
6
:
: Program
Off
7
8
9
10
11
12
Program Playback
/Enter/0 9/Clear/Play Mode
4
Press
C
/
D
/
B
/
A
to select “Program Playback” and press ENTER.
The programs you selected will start to playback in the order.
• In case of JPEG file, press SKIP the program playback.
to continue
• To resume normal playback, select Play Mode:
“Off” in step 2.
Play Mode
Repeat
1 9
2 3
3 11
Clear
4
5
6
:
: Program
Off
7
8
9
10
11
12
Program Playback
/Enter/0 9/Clear/Play Mode
■
To change the program
1. In the program mode, press
C
/
D
/
B
/
A
to select the track number.
2. Press Number buttons (0–9) to select the track number to be replaced.
■
To clear the program one by one
In the program mode, press
C
/
D
/
B
/
A
to select the track number. Then press CLEAR.
■
To clear all the programs
In the program mode, press
C
/
D
/
B
/
A
to select “Clear”.
Then press ENTER.
Notes:
• In playing back the Video CD with PBC, you cannot set
Program playback.
• The program is cancelled when you open the disc tray or turn the power off.
VCD
CD
Random playback
1 Press PLAY MODE during playback or stop mode.
3 Press PLAY.
The Random Playback will start.
2 Press
B
/
C
/
D
to select Play Mode, then press
A
to select “Random”.
Play Mode
Repeat
/Play Mode
Random
Off
• If you set “Random” during playback mode,
Random playback will begin after the track that is currently being played has ended.
• To resume normal playback, select Play Mode:
“Off” in step 2.
Note:
In playing back the Video CD with PBC, you cannot set
Random playback.
Advanced playback (DVD)
Changing soundtrack language/
Setting surround sound
B
/
A
AUDIO
DVD
VCD
Changing soundtrack language
You can select the language when you play a multilingual disc.
In case of Video CD playback
1 Press AUDIO during playback.
The current soundtrack language will appear.
Audio type changes as follows each time you press AUDIO.
LR
QSound Off
L
QSound Off
R
QSound Off
2/8 Fra Dolby Digital
QSound Off
2 Press AUDIO repeatedly until the desired language is selected.
1/8 Eng Dolby Digital
QSound Off
•
The on screen display will disappear after a few seconds.
Notes:
• If the desired language is not heard after pressing the button several times, the language is not recorded on the disc.
• Changing soundtrack language is cancelled when you open the disc tray. The initial default language or available language will be heard if the disc is played back again.
DVD
VCD
CD
This DVD video player equipped with a “QSound”. It can produce the effect of being in a cinema or a concert hall.
1 During disc playback press AUDIO.
To cancel Surround mode:
Follow the left steps 1~2, then press
B
or
A
to select the “Off” position.
1/8 Eng Dolby Digital
QSound Off
Notes:
• The “QSound” is effective only for the sound of disc.
• The QSound setting can also be changed in the function setting 58 .
2 Press
B
or
A
to select “On”.
1/8 Eng Dolby Digital
QSound On
• The on screen display will disappear after a few seconds.
Manufactured under license from QSound Labs,
Inc. U.S. patent Nos. 5,105,462, 5,208,860 and
5,440,638 and various foreign counterpart.
Copyright QSound Labs, Inc. 1998-2002.
QXpander ™ is a trademark of QSound Labs, Inc.
All rights reserved.
50
Changing angles/Title selection/DVD menu
TOP MENU
MENU
C
/
D
/
B
/
ENTER
A
PLAY
ANGLE
DVD
Changing angles
When playing back a disc recorded with multi-angle facility, you can change the angle that you are viewing the scene from.
1
Press ANGLE during playback.
The current angle will appear.
2 Press ANGLE repeatedly until the desired angle is selected.
1/9
Note:
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the angles even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD.
DVD
Title selection
Two or more titles are recorded on some discs. If the title menu is recorded on the disc, you can select the desired title.
1
Press TOP MENU during playback.
Title menu appears on the screen.
3 Press ENTER or PLAY.
The playback of the selected title will start.
2 Press
C
/
D
/
B
/
A
to select the desired title.
Note:
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to select the title.
Depending on the DVD, a “title menu” may simply be called a
“menu” or “title” in the instructions supplied with the disc.
DVD
DVD menu
Some DVDs allow you to select the disc contents using the menu.
When you play back these DVDs, you can select the subtitle language and sound-track language, etc. using the menu.
1 Press MENU during playback.
The DVD menu appears on the screen.
• Press MENU again to resume playback at the scene when you pressed MENU.
3 Press ENTER.
The menu continues to another screen. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set the item completely.
2 Press
C
/
D
/
B
/
A
to select the desired item.
Note:
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to resume playback from the scene point when you pressed MENU.
49
Subtitles/To turn off the PBC
/ / /
ENTER
A
PLAY MODE
1
SUBTITLE
DVD
Subtitles
When playing back a disc recorded with subtitles, you can select the subtitle language or turn the subtitle off.
To turn off the PBC
1
Press PLAY MODE in the stop mode.
1
Press SUBTITLE repeatedly during playback until your desired language appears.
1/8 Eng
2 Press / to select Play Mode, then press
/ to select “Off”.
Play Mode
Repeat
/Play Mode
Off
Off
2 To turn off the subtitle, press SUBTITLE until
“Off” appears.
Off
3
Press PLAY MODE again to make the screen disappear.
• The on screen display will disappear after a few seconds.
Notes:
• Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change subtitles, or to turn subtitles on or off.
• While playing a DVD, the subtitle may change when you open or close the disc tray.
• In some cases, a selected subtitle language may not be changed immediately.
To turn on the PBC
Follow the above steps 1~2, then press or to select
“PBC”.
Note:
You can also turn off the PBC by pressing number button 1 and ENTER in the stop mode.
51
Advanced playback (DVD)
52
MP3/WMA/JPEG operation
This player can play back the MP3/WMA/JPEG-data which has been recorded on CD-R or CD-RW. To produce the MP3/WMA
JPEG-data, you need a Windows-PC with CD-RW drive and a MP3/WMA/JPEG-encoding Software (not supplied).
The Apple-HFS-System cannot be played.
Note:
This unit requires discs/recordings to meet certain technical standards in order to achieve optimal playback quality.
Pre-recorded DVDs are automatically set to these standards. There are many different types of recordable disc formats
(including CD-R containing MP3/WMA files). Given the fact that technology in this area is still maturing, Toshiba cannot guarantee that all genre of recordable discs will produce optimal playback quality. The technical criteria set out in this owner’s manual are meant as a guide only.
Please be advised that you must obtain permission from the applicable copyright owners to download copyrighted content, including music files, in any format, including the MP3 and WMA formats, prior to the downloading thereof.
Toshiba has no right to grant and does not grant permission to download any copyrighted content.
MP3/WMA/JPEG CD information
Limitations on MP3/WMA/JPEG CD playback
• MP3/WMA/JPEG CD is the disc that is standardized by ISO9660, its file name must include 3-digits extension letters, “mp3”, “wma”, “jpg”.
• MP3/WMA/JPEG CD must be correspond to the ISO standardized files.
• This unit can read 600 files per disc. If one directory has more than 600 files, it reads up to 600 files, the remaining files will be omitted.
• The unit is able to recognize up to a maximum of 50 directories per disc.
• MP3/WMA/JPEG CDs cannot be used for the purpose of recording.
•
If the CD has both audio tracks and MP3/WMA/JPEG files, only audio tracks are played.
• It may take more than one minute for this unit to read MP3/WMA/JPEG files depending on its structure.
• Music recorded by “Joliet Recording Specification” can be played back, the file name is displayed (within 16 letters) on the screen. Long file names will be condensed.
• The music files recorded by “Hierarchical File System” (HFS) cannot be played.
Limitations on display
• The maximum number for display is 16 letters.
Available letters for display are the following: capital or small alphabets of A through Z, numbers of 0 through 9, and _ (under score).
• Other letters than those above are replaced in hyphen.
Notes on MP3/WMA/JPEG files
To play back MP3/WMA/JPEG CD in the recorded order,
1. Use MP3/WMA/JPEG software that records data alphabetically or numerically.
2. Name each file including two-digit or three-digit number (ex. “01” “02” or “001” “002”).
3. Refrain from making too many sub-folders.
CAUTION:
• Some MP3/WMA/JPEG CDs cannot be played back depending on the recording conditions.
• The CD-R/RW that has no music data or non MP3/WMA/JPEG files cannot be played back.
Standard, sampling frequency, and the bit rate:
MP3 CD
MPEG-1 Audio
32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz
32kbps ~ 320kbps (constant bit rate or variable bit rate)
The recommend recording setting for a high-quality sound is 44.1kHz of sampling frequency and 128kbps of constant bit rate.
WMA CD
WMA version 7, and 8
32kHz, 48kbps
44.1kHz, 48kbps ~ 192kbps
48kHz, 128kbps ~ 192kbps
The file recorded by mono, 48kHz, 48 kbps is not available to this unit.
Microsoft, Windows Media, and Windows Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in both the
United States and other countries.
Advanced playback (DVD)
MP3/WMA/JPEG operation (continued)
TOP MENU
MENU
▲
/
▼
/ /
ENTER
PLAY
STOP
SKIP
PAUSE
0–9
/
ANGLE
CD
JPEG CD playback
CD
Slide show playback
1 Place a disc on which JPEG files have been recorded onto the tray.
2 A file menu screen will appear on the screen.
Press
B
/
A
to select folder.
CD
4
5
1
2
Collection
Pic-1
Pic-2
Pic-3
Pic-4
Pic-5
Pic-6
Pic-7
8
9
11
12
14
-/36
Pic-8
Pic-9
Pic-10
Pic-11
Pic-12
Pic-13
Pic-14
/0-9/Enter/Play Mode/Menu
3
Press
C
/
D
/
B
/
A
or Number buttons (0–9) to select the desired file.
To display a picture menu, press MENU.
(To return to a file menu, press TOP MENU.)
Press
B
/
A
or
C
/
D
to select the desired file.
The slide show enables you to view pictures (files) one after another automatically.
Preparation:
Set “JPEG Interval” setting to “5 Seconds”, “10 Seconds” or “15 Seconds” 58 .
1
Select your desired starting file for the slide show in the step 3 as left.
2 Press ENTER to start slide show from the selected file.
• To display next list, press SKIP / .
• When PLAY has been pressed after displaying the file menu, or when the disc tray has been closed after pressing PLAY, playback begins automatically starting from the first file. In this case, if the first file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played back. If the first file is an MP3/WMA file, only MP3/WMA files are played back in order.
4
Press ENTER. The selected picture appears on the screen.
• If you press PAUSE during the slide show, the slide show stops temporary. “
4
” appears briefly on the picture.
If the picture appears upside down or sideways, press
ANGLE repeatedly until it’s right side up.
“ ”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears briefly on the screen.
Press PLAY or SKIP again to resume the slide show.
• When the slide show playback finished the file list appears.
• To stop the slide show, press STOP. The file list appears.
54
Rotating an image
You can rotate an image by 90 degrees by pressing
ANGLE during playback of the image.
“ ”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” appears briefly on the screen.
5
Press STOP to end playback.
The file menu appears on the screen.
If you want to watch the other file, repeat steps
3 ~ 4.
TOP MENU
▲
/
▼
/ /
ENTER
PLAY
STOP
0–9
CD
MP3/WMA CD playback
1
Place a disc on which MP3 or WMA files have been recorded onto the disc tray.
2 A file menu screen will appear on the screen.
Press
B
/
A
or ENTER to select folder.
CD
3
4
10
11
-/72 --:--
Pops
Japan
Bay Bridge
CLOSE MY EYES
DIVE TO BLUE
Honey
BLUE EYES
Blurry Eyes
13
/0-9/Enter/Play Mode flower
Lies and Truthwinter fall
Rain
Strawberry
Welcome party
Thailand
3
Press
C
/
D
/
B
/
A
or Number buttons (0–9) to select the desired file.
5
Press STOP to end playback.
• The unit records the stopped point. “ ” appears on the screen. Press PLAY to resume playback (from the scene point).
• If you press STOP again or unload the disc, the unit will clear the stopped point.
About file menu
Operation
Media type
Elapsed time
File number
CD
Folder
• In case the folder includes more than 15 files, press or
A
to display next file list.
-/72 --:--
4
5
CD
Pops
Japan
Bay Bridge
CLOSE MY EYES
DIVE TO BLUE
Honey
BLUE EYES
Blurry Eyes
10
11
13
-/72 --:-flower
Lies and Truthwinter fall
Rain
Strawberry
Welcome party
Thailand
/0-9/Enter/Play Mode
CD
Pops
Mother
Hold Your Last
/0-9/Enter/Play Mode
• When PLAY has been pressed after displaying the file menu, or when the disc tray has been closed using
PLAY, playback begins automatically starting from the first file. In this case, if the first file is an MP3/WMA file, only MP3/WMA files are played back in order. If the first file is a JPEG file, the first JPEG file is played back.
4
Press ENTER.
The selected file starts playing back.
/0-9/Enter/Play Mode/Menu
: Indicates MP3-file
: Indicates WMA-file
: Indicates JPEG-file
Notes:
• The picture menu is displayed when the FUJICOLOR CD or the Kodak Picture CD are played. To display the file menu, press TOP MENU.
• In the case of a CD containing a mixture of MP3, WMA and
JPEG files, the files are played back by selecting them from the file menu.
• MP3 or WMA file on the Kodak Picture CD is not recognized on this unit.
Notes:
• During MP3/WMA/JPEG-Playback, you cannot use SEARCH,
A-B Repeat functions.
• You can use Repeat (Track or All), Random functions and
Program playback for MP3/WMA/JPEG CD Playback 47 48 .
53
Function setup (DVD)
Customizing the function settings
You can change the default settings to customize performance to your preference.
SETUP
C
/
D
/
B
/
ENTER
A
RETURN
DVD
VCD
CD
Setting procedure
1 Press SETUP during stop mode.
The following on-screen display appears.
5
To make SETUP screen disappear, press
SETUP or RETURN.
/Enter/Setup/Return
2 Press
B
or
A
to select the desired section, then press
D
or ENTER.
3 Press
C
or
D
to select the desired option.
4 Change the selection using
B
or
A
, by referring to the corresponding pages 57~59.
• Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change
• other settings.
To select another operation, go back to step 2 by pressing
C repeatedly.
55
Function setup (DVD)
Customizing the function settings (continued)
Setting details
Section Option
Menu
Subtitle
Audio
Details
To select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and
“Audio” if more than one language are available on the disc.
Page
E.B.L.
Tv Screen
Display
Picture Mode
JPEG Interval
Dialogue
QSound
Password
Parental
Select Files
Output
To select On or Off for E.B.L. (Enhanced Black
Level).
To select a picture size according to the aspect ratio of your TV.
To turn on or de-activate the operational status display on the screen.
To select a preferred picture mode from “Video”,
“Film” or “Auto”.
To select a preferred setting for the slide show playback.
To select On or Off for DRC (Dynamic Range Control).
To select On or Off for QSound.
Input 4-digit password to set the parental level.
To select a preferred parental level for the parental setting.
To select a preferred file type for playing back a CD containing a mixture of file types .
To select a preferred video output signal from “Progressive” or “Interlace”.
57
58
59
56
Function setup (DVD)
Customizing the function settings (continued)
Setting details
58
Picture Mode
There are two types of source content in pictures recorded in DVD video discs: film content (pictures recorded from films at 24 frames per second) and video content (video signals recorded at 30 frames per second). Make this selection according to the type of content being viewed.
Note:
Auto:
Select this position normally.
Film:
The DVD player automatically detects source content, film or video, of playback source, and converts that signal in the progressive output format in an appropriate method.
The DVD player converts film content pictures in the progressive output format appropriately. Suitable for playback of film content pictures. The progressive output feature will be most effective under this selection.
Video: The DVD player filters video signal, and converts it in the progressive output format appropriately.
Suitable for playback of video content pictures.
Depending on the disc, pictures may be cut off or doubled. In this case, select “Video”.
JPEG Interval
You can continuously play back all JPEG files automatically.
After the setting below, start playing the disc on which
JPEG files have been recorded.
Off:
Plays back one file at a time.
5 Seconds:
Plays back images in the form of a slide show at
5 second intervals.
10 Seconds:
Plays back images in the form of a slide show at
10 second intervals.
15 Seconds:
Plays back images in the form of a slide show in
15 second intervals.
Dialogue
QSound
Off: DRC (Std)
Off
/Setup/Return
Dialogue
DRC (Dynamic Range Control) enables you to control the dynamic range so as to achieve a suitable sound for your equipment.
On: DRC (TV):
Loud sound such as explosion or similar is toned down slightly when played back. This makes it suitable for when it is connected to a stereo.
Off: DRC (Std):
It plays back at the recording level on the disc.
Notes:
• This function works only during playback of Dolby Digital recorded discs.
• The level of Dynamic Range Reduction may differ depending on DVD video disc.
QSound
This DVD video player equipped with a “QSound”. It can produce the effect of being in a cinema or a concert hall.
On: The QSound operates.
Off: The QSound is disengaged.
Note:
The QSound setting can also be changed with AUDIO on the remote control
50
.
Menu
Subtitle
Audio
/Setup/Return
English
English
English
E.B.L
Tv Screen
Display
Off
4:3
On
Picture Mode
JPEG Interval
/Setup/Return
Auto
Off
Menu, Subtitle, Audio
You can select the language of “Menu”, “Subtitle” and
“Audio” if more than one languages are recorded onto the disc.
English, Francais, Espanol:
The selected language will be heard or seen.
Other:
Other language can be selected (see the
“Language code list” 61 ).
Original: (Audio)
The unit will select the first priority language of each disc.
Off: (Subtitle)
Subtitles do not appear.
Notes:
• If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the first-priority language is selected.
• If you want to change the OSD language, you can perform it by TV MENU
23
.
E.B.L.
To select the black level of playback pictures, set your preference and monitor’s ability.
On: Enhanced grey scale (0 IRE cut off)
Off: Standard grey scale (7.5 IRE cut off)
Tv Screen
You have the following screen sizes to choose from:
4:3 (Letter box):
Select this mode when connecting to a conven tional TV. When playing back a wide screen-DVD disc, it displays the wide picture with black bands at the top and bottom of screen.
4:3 (Pan scan):
It displays the wide picture on the whole screen with left and right edges automatically cut off.
16:9 (Wide):
Select this mode when connecting to a widescreen TV. A wide screen picture is displayed full size.
Press OPEN/CLOSE to view in the selected screen size.
Note:
If the DVD disc is not formatted in the pan & scan style, it displays 4:3 style.
Display
On screen display can be switched on or off when you press the buttons.
On: On screen displays appear when you press the buttons (factory setting).
Off: On screen displays do not appear when you press any buttons.
57
Parental
Select Files
Output
----
All
Interlace
/0Ð9/Enter/Clear/Setup/Return
4. While holding 7 down on the remote control, press
STOP on the front panel. “PASSWORD CLEAR” appears on the screen.
5. Enter a new password again.
Select Files
Parental control setting
Some discs are specified not suitable for children. Such discs can be limited not to play back with the unit.
1) Press or
C
or
D
to select “Parental”, then press
B
A
until the level you require appears.
• Level Off: The parental control setting does not function.
•
Level 8: All DVD software can be played back.
• Level 1: DVD software for adults cannot be played back.
Select from the level 1 to level 8. The limitation will be more severe as the level number is lower.
2) Press
C
or
D
to select “Password”.
Press Number buttons (0–9) to input a 4-digit password. Be sure to remember this number!
• If you input a wrong number, press CLEAR.
3) Press ENTER to store the password.
Note: Now the rating is locked and the setting cannot be changed unless you enter the correct pass word.
4) Press OPEN/CLOSE to activate Parental control setting. (See “Temporary disabling of rating level by
DVD disc” 60 .)
Notes:
• Depending on the discs, the unit cannot limit playback.
• Some discs may not be encoded with specific rating level information though its disc jacket says “adult.” For those discs, the age restriction will not work.
To change the parental level
1) Press
C or
D
to select “Password”.
2) Press Number buttons (0–9) to enter the password you have stored.
3) Press ENTER.
• The rating is now unlocked.
4) Press
C
or
D
to select “Parental”, then press
B or
A
to change the parental level.
5) Press
C
or
D
to select “Password”, then press
Number buttons (0–9) to enter the password.
Note: You can change the password if you want.
6) Press ENTER.
Now the parental level is changed and locked.
If you forget the password...
1. Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.
2. Remove the disc.
3. Press OPEN/CLOSE again to close the disc tray.
“No Disc” appears on the screen.
When playing back a CD containing a mixture of MP3,
WMA and JPEG files, only MP3/WMA or JPEG files can be displayed on the file menu.
All:
Displays all files.
Music Only:
Displays only MP3/WMA files.
Pictures Only:
Displays only JPEG files.
Output
You can select the video output signal of the DVD video player to the TV from “Interlace” or “Progressive”.
1) Press
C
or
D
to select “Output”.
2) Press
A
, then press
C
or
D
to select “Interlace” or
“Progressive”.
Interlace:
Select when connecting to a composite TV or a TV equipped with component video inputs but progressive scan is not compatible.
Progressive:
Select when connecting to a TV equipped with component video inputs, progressive scan compatible.
3) Press ENTER.
Warning:
Once “Progressive” is selected when connecting to a
TV progressive scan incompatible, no image will be seen on the video display.
In this case, you must reset the unit by pressing STOP on the front panel for five seconds. The video output will be restored to “Interlace” setting, and a picture will once again be seen on a conventional analog display.
Notes:
• Some discs may not be played back with the progressive scanning mode correctly because of the disc characteristics or recording condition.
• Once Progressive scan on, all other video outputs are disabled except component video outputs.
Note:
If each setup (pages 57~59) has been completed, the unit can always be worked under the same conditions (especially with DVD discs).
Each setup will be retained in the memory even if you turn the power off.
59
Function setup (DVD)
Temporary disabling of rating level by DVD disc
Depending on the DVD disc, the disc may try to temporarily cancel the rating level that you have set.
It is up to you to decide whether to cancel the rating level or not.
OPEN/CLOSE
▲
/
▼
ENTER
RETURN
PLAY
0–9
1
Load a DVD disc and press PLAY or OPEN/
CLOSE on the unit
42
.
4 Enter the password with Number buttons (0–9).
Then press ENTER.
To exit from the entry, press RETURN.
Please enter the
-
Enter/0 9/Clear/Return
2 If the DVD disc has been designed to temporarily cancel the Rating level, the screen which follows the “Reading” screen will change, depending on which disc is played. If you select “YES” with the
ENTER key, “Your disc exceeds the parental control level#.” screen will then appear.
Reading
Your disc exceeds the parental control level#.
Parental Control Level
Cancel Picture
/Enter/Return
5 Playback will commence if the entered password was correct.
Note:
This temporary cancellation of rating level will be kept until the disc is ejected.
When the disc is ejected, the original rating level will be set again automatically.
3 If you wish to cancel the set rating level temporarily, select “Parental Control Level” with
C
or
D
, then press ENTER. If the 4-digit password at step 2 on page 59 has been set, the password entering screen will appear as shown in step 4.
Alternatively, if the password has not been set, playback will commence. If you don’t know (or have forgotten) the password, select “Cancel Picture”.
The setting screen will disappear. Press OPEN/
CLOSE to remove the disc.
60
Others
Troubleshooting
Before calling a service technician, please check the following table for a possible cause of the symptoms and some solutions.
Symptoms Solutions
DVD/VCR
DVD/VCR does not operate.
No picture.
No sound.
The remote control does not function.
No Cable TV reception.
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in.
• Try another AC outlet.
• Unplug unit, then plug it back in.
• Select the DVD or VCR mode before operating.
• Antenna connection is not correct or antenna cable is disconnected.
• The video channel is not in the correct position or the TV is not set to the video channel 3 or 4.
• Check the unit is connected correctly.
• The video input selector of the TV is not set to VIDEO. Set to VIDEO (or equivalent).
• Channel is set to the external mode.
• Check the unit is connected correctly.
• Check the input selector of the amplifier is set properly.
• The unit is in the Special playback mode.
• Aim the remote control at the remote sensor.
• Operate within Approx. 7 Meters or reduce the light in the room.
• Clear the path of the beam.
• The batteries are weak. Replace the batteries.
• Check the batteries are inserted correctly.
• Check all Cable TV connections.
• Station or Cable TV system problems, try another station.
VCR
TV recording does not work.
Timer recording does not work.
Noise bars on screen.
• The erase prevention tab of the video cassette is broken off.
• The unit is in the external input mode.
• The time is not set correctly.
• The recording start/end time is not set correctly.
• The TIMER REC has not been pressed ( is not lit).
• Tracking adjustment beyond range of automatic tracking circuit. Try Manual tracking adjustment.
• Video heads are dirty.
• The tape is worn or damaged.
DVD
Display is not shown in your language.
• Select proper language in the menu options.
Playback doesn’t start.
• No disc is inserted.
• The disc may be dirty. Clean up the disc.
• The unit cannot play DVD-ROMs, etc.
Stopping playback, slow-motion play, repeat play, or memory play, etc. cannot be performed.
• Some discs may not do some of the functions.
No picture, or the screen is blurred or divided into two parts.
No 4:3 (16:9) picture.
No on-screen display.
No surround sound.
The unit or remote operation key is not functioning.
Playback does not start when the title is selected.
Audio soundtrack and/or subtitle language is not changed when you play back a DVD.
• The PROGRESSIVE scan is “On” although the unit is connected to a TV via the VIDEO OUT or the S-VIDEO OUT jack.
• The setup does not match your TV.
• Select Display “On”.
• The setup does not match your stereo system.
• Turn off the unit and unplug the AC power cord for several minutes, then replug it.
• Check the Parental setup.
• Multilingual language is not recorded on the DVD disc.
No subtitle.
Angle cannot be changed.
• Some discs have no subtitles.
• Subtitles are cleared. Press SUBTITLE.
• Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD disc.
appears on the screen.
• The function is prohibited with the unit or the disc.
Page
13
16,17
51
49
44
57
42
7
8
–
59
50,51
5
–
5
30,42
14~17
22
14~19
–
–
14~19
–
31,44
29,34
24
37
37
31
31
–
57
57
20
–
59,60
62
Other
Language code list
Enter the appropriate code number for the initial settings “Menu”, “Subtitle” and/or “Audio” 57 .
Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code Language Name Code
Abkhazian
Afar
Afrikaans
Albanian
Amharic
Arabic
Armenian
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
1112
1111
1116
2927
1123
1128
1835
1129
1135
1136
1211
Fiji
Finnish
French
Frisian
Galician
Georgian
German
Greek
Greenlandic
Guarani
Gujarati
1620
1619
1628
1635
1722
2111
1415
1522
2122
1724
1731
Lingala
Lithuanian
Macedonian
Malagasy
Malay
Malayalam
Maltese
Maori
Marathi
Moldavian
Mongolian
2224
2230
2321
2317
2329
2322
2330
2319
2328
2325
2324
Singhalese
Slovak
Slovenian
Somali
Spanish
Sundanese
Swahili
Swedish
Tagalog
Tajik
Tamil
2933
2932
3022
3017
3011
2919
2921
2922
2925
1529
2931
Basque 1531 Hausa
Bengali; Bangla 1224 Hebrew
Bhutani
Bihari
1436
1218
Hindi
Hungarian
Breton
Bulgarian
1228 Icelandic
1217 Indonesian
Burmese
Byelorussian
Cambodian
Catalan
Chinese
Corsican
2335
1215
2123
1311
3618
1325
Interlingua
Irish
Italian
Japanese
Javanese
Kannada
1811 Nauru
1933 Nepali
1819 Norwegian
1831 Oriya
2411
2415
2425
2528
Tatar
Telugu
Thai
Tibetan
1929 Panjabi 2611 Tigrinya
1924 Pashto, Pushto 2629 Tonga
1911 Persian
1711 Polish
1930 Portuguese
2011 Quechua
1611
2622
2630
2731
Turkish
Turkmen
Twi
Ukrainian
2033 Rhaeto-Romance 2823 Urdu
2124 Romanian 2825 Uzbek
3030
3015
3018
1225
3019
3025
3028
3021
3033
3121
3128
3136
Croatian
Czech
Danish
Dutch
English
Esperanto
Estonian
Faroese
1828 Kashmiri
1329 Kazakh
1411 Kirghiz
2422 Korean
1524 Kurdish
1525 Laothian
2129
2121
2135
2125
Russian
Samoan
Sanskrit
Scots Gaelic
2831
2923
2911
1714
Vietnamese
Volapük
Welsh
Wolof
2131 Serbian 2928 Xhosa
2225 Serbo-Croatian 2918 Yiddish
1530 Latin 2211 Shona
1625 Latvian, Lettish 2232 Sindhi
2924
2914
Yoruba
Zulu
3219
3225
1335
3325
3418
2019
3525
3631
61
Specifications
General
Power supply
Power consumption
Weight
Dimensions
Tuner
Antenna input/output
RF channel output
Color system
Video head
Audio track
Hi-Fi frequency response
Hi-Fi dynamic range
FF/REW time at 25˚C (77˚F)
Applicable disc
Frequency range
S/N ratio
Harmonic distortion
Wow and flutter
Operating conditions
Input/Output
DVD/VCR
Video input
Video output
Audio input
Audio output
DVD
S-video output
AC 120 V 60 Hz
Operation: 18 W, Stand by: 2 W
7.7 lbs (3.5 kg)
Width: 16-15/16 inches (430 mm)
Height: 3-1/2 inches (89.5 mm)
Depth: 9-1/16 inches (230 mm)
181 channel freq. synthesized
VHF
UHF
2-13
14-69
Cable TV 113 Channels
UHF/VHF 75
Ω coaxial
Channel 3 or 4, Switchable
NTSC
4 Rotary heads
Hi-Fi sound - 2 Tracks / MONO sound - 1 Track
20 Hz to 20,000 Hz
More than 90dB
Approx. 1 minute and 48 seconds (with T-120 Cassette Tape)
DVD (12 cm, 8 cm), CD (12 cm, 8 cm)
DVD: 4 Hz-22 kHz, CD: 4 Hz-20 kHz
90dB (DVD)
0.02% (DVD)
Less than 0.01% Wrms
Temperature: 5˚C-40˚C (41˚F-104˚F), Operating status: Horizontal
1.0 V (p-p), 75
1.0 V (p-p), 75
–8 dBm, 50 k
–8 dBm, 1 k
Ω
Ω
Ω
Ω
, negative sync., pin jack x 2
, negative sync., pin jack x 1
, negative sync., pin jack (L/R) x 2
, negative sync., pin jack (L/R) x 1
Component video output
Audio output (BITSTREAM/PCM
COAXIAL)
Audio output (ANALOG)
(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75
Ω
, negative sync., Mini DIN 4-pin x 1
(C) 0.286 V (p-p), 75
Ω
(Y) 1.0 V (p-p), 75
Ω
, negative sync., pin jack x 1
(P
B
)/(P
R
) 0.7 V (p-p), 75
Ω
, pin jack x 2
0.5 V (p-p), 75
Ω
, pin jack x 1
–12 dBm, 1 k
Supplied accessories
Audio/video cable ................................................. 1
Remote control (SE-R0170) ................................. 1
Batteries (AAA) ..................................................... 2
75
Ω
coaxial cable ................................................ 1
Ω
, pin jacks (L, R) x 1
• This model complies with the above specifications.
•
Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.
• This model may not be compatible with features and/or specifications that may be added in the future.
63
CAUTION
THIS DIGITAL VIDEO PLAYER EMPLOYS A LASER SYSTEM.
TO ENSURE PROPER USE OF THIS PRODUCT, PLEASE READ THIS SERVICE MANUAL CARE-
FULLY AND RETAIN FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. SHOULD THE UNIT REQUIRE MAINTENANCE,
CONTACT AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE LOCATION-SEE SERVICE PROCEDURE.
USE OF CONTROLS, ADJUSTMENTS OR THE PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
TO PREVENT DIRECT EXPOSURE TO LASER BEAM, DO NOT TRY TO OPEN THE ENCLOSURE.
VISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT WHEN THE ENCLOSURE IS OPENED. DO NOT
STARE INTO BEAM.
Location of the required Marking
The rating sheet and the safety caution are on the rear of the unit.
CERTIFICATION: COMPLIES WITH FDA RADIATION PERFORMANCE
STANDARDS, 21 CFR SUBCHAPTER J.
PREPARATION OF SERVICING
The laser diode used for a pickup head may be destroyed with external static electricity.
Moreover, even if it is operating normally after repair, when static electricity discharge is received at the time of repair, the life of the product may be shortened.
Please perform the following measure against static electricity, be careful of destruction of a laser diode at the time of repair.
• Place the unit on a workstation equipped to protect against static electricity, such as conductive mat.
• Soldering iron with ground wire or ceramic type is used.
• A worker needs to use a ground conductive wrist strap for body.
A1-1
IMPORTANT SERVICE SAFETY INFORMATION
Safety precautions to be followed during servicing:
1.
2.
Parts marked with an are critical parts for safety. Replace only with the one described in the parts list.
Before returning the DVD product to the customer, make the appropriate leakage current check or resistance measurements to ensure that exposed parts are properly insulated from the supply circuit.
A leakage current check is recommended for this unit. Plug the AC line cord directly into a 120V 60Hz AC outlet (do not use an isolation transformer for this check). Use a leakage current tester (Fig. 1) or a metering system which complies with Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1492). Measure for current from all exposed metal parts of the cabinet to a known earth ground: particularly, any exposed metal part having a return path to the chassis. Any current measured must not exceed 0.5mA. Any measurement not within the limits outlined above are indicative of a potential shock hazard and corrective action must be taken before returning the unit to the customer.
(Reading should not be above 0.5mA)
Leakage Current Tester
1.5K ohm
0.15
µ
F
PRODUCT UNDER TEST
2-Blade polarized type cord set
Test all exposed metal surfaces
TEST PROBE
Fig. 1 AC Leakage Test
KNOWN EARTH
GROUND
A1-2
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
READ INSTRUCTIONS
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the unit is operated.
RETAIN INSTRUCTIONS
The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.
HEED WARNINGS
All warnings on the unit and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.
FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS
All operating and use instructions should be followed.
CLEANING
Unplug this unit from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
ATTACHMENTS
Do not use attachments not recommended by the unit’s manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
WATER AND MOISTURE
Do not use this unit near water. For example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.
ACCESSORIES
PORTABLE CART WARNING
(symbol provided by RETAC)
Do not place this unit on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The
unit may fall, causing serious injury, and serious damage to the unit. Use only
8A.
with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer.
An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops,
9.
excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn.
VENTILATION
S3125A
Slots and openings in the cabinet and in the back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the unit, and to protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the unit on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This unit should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat source. This unit should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions
10.
11.
have been adhered to.
POWER SOURCES
This unit should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the rating plate. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your appliance dealer or local power company. For units intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.
GROUNDING OR POLARIZATION
This unit is equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other).
This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. If your unit is equipped with a 3-wire
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
grounding-type plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin, this plug will only fit into a grounding-type power outlet. This too, is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding-type plug.
POWER-CORD PROTECTION
Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance.
LIGHTNING
To protect your unit from a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the unit due to lightning and power line surges.
POWER LINES
An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits, as contact with them might be fatal.
OVERLOADING
Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords, as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.
OBJECT AND LIQUID ENTRY
Do not push objects through any openings in this unit, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill or spray any type of liquid into the unit.
A1-3
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
(CONTINUED)
17.
18.
19.
OUTDOOR ANTENNA GROUNDING
If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the unit, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Section 810 of the National
Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
SERVICING
Do not attempt to service this unit yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
DAMAGE REQUIRING SERVICE
Unplug this unit from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a.
When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged.
b.
If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the unit.
c.
d.
If the unit has been exposed to rain or water.
If the unit does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions, as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the unit to its normal operation.
e.
f.
If the unit has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
When the unit exhibits a distinct change in performance, this indicates a need for service.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician uses replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or those that have the same characteristics as the original parts.
Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock or other hazards.
SAFETY CHECK
Upon completion of any service or repairs to this unit, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the unit is in proper operating condition.
WALL OR CEILING MOUNTING
The product should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.
HEAT
The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
DISC TRAY
Keep your fingers well clear of the disc tray as it is closing. It may cause serious personal injury.
CONNECTING
When you connect the product to other equipment, turn off the power and unplug all of the equipment from the wall outlet. Failure to do so may cause an electric shock and serious personal injury. Read the owner's manual of the other equipment carefully and follow the instructions when making any connections.
SOUND VOLUME
Reduce the volume to the minimum level before you turn on the product. Otherwise, sudden high volume sound may cause hearing or speaker damage.
SOUND DISTORTION
Do not allow the product output distorted sound for a longtime. It may cause speaker overheating and fire.
HEADPHONES
When you use the headphones, keep the volume at a moderate level. If you use the headphones continuously with high volume sound, it may cause hearing damage.
LASER BEAM
Do not look into the opening of the disc tray or ventilation opening of the product to see the source of the laser beam. It may cause sight damage.
DISC
Do not use a cracked, deformed, or repaired disc. These discs are easily broken and may cause serious personal injury and product malfunction.
NOTE TO CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.
A1-4
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
(CONTINUED)
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
ANTENNA LEAD
IN WIRE
GROUND
CLAMP
ELECTRIC SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC-NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
S2898A
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
A1-5
WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK
[ When removing the DVD Deck ]
Before removing Pick Up PCB and DVD PCB connector, short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1 using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.
[ When installing the DVD Deck ]
Remove all the soldering on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up PCB and DVD
PCB connector.
NOTE
• Before your operation, please read “PREPARATION OF SERVICING”.
• Use the Lead Free solder.
• Manual soldering conditions
• Soldering temperature: 320
±
20˚C
• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds
• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu
• When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the draw in equipment over the Pick Up Unit to prevent the
Flux smoke from it.
Fig. 1
Short circuit using a soldering iron.
Pick Up PCB
A1-6
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
TAPE REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY
Remove the Top Cabinet, Front Cabinet and DVD Block. (Refer to item 1 of the
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.)
Remove the screw
1
of the Deck Chassis and remove the Loading Motor. (Refer to Fig. 2)
Rotate the Pinch Roller Cam in the direction of the arrow by hand to slacken the Video Tape.
Rotate the Clutch Ass'y either d i rection to wind the Video Tape in the Cassette Case.
Repeat steps 3~4. Then take out the Video Cassette from the Deck Chassis. Be careful not to scratch the tape.
Loading Motor
Screw
1
Capstan DD Unit
Pinch Roller Cam
Fig. 1
Main Cam
Main Chassis (Front Side)
Fig. 2
Clutch Ass'y
DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove the Top and Front Cabinet. (Refer to item 1 of the DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS.)
Rotate the Main Gear in the direction of the arrow by hand.
(Refer to Fig. 1)
Manually open the Tray.
Main Gear DVD Deck
Fig. 1
A1-7
PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL
4 DIGIT PASSWORD CANCELLATION
If the stored 4 digit password in the Rating Level menu needs to be cancelled, please follow the steps below.
1.
Turn Unit ON.
2.
Press and hold the '7' key on the remote control unit.
3.
Simultaneously press and hold the 'STOP' key on the front panel.
4.
Hold both keys for more than 3 seconds.
5.
The On Screen Display message 'PASSWORD CLEAR' will appear.
6.
The 4 digit password has now been cleared
TRAY LOCK
Tray cannot be opened by setting the Tray Lock, please follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn Unit ON.
Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.
Press it in order of 'SETUP', 'SUBTITLE', '3', 'AUDIO' and '0' key of a remote control unit.
The On Screen Display message ' ' will appear.
The Tray Lock has now been set up.
To unlock the Tray Lock, please follow the steps below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Turn Unit ON.
Set the DVD to the Stop Mode.
Press it in order of 'SETUP', 'SUBTITLE', '3', 'AUDIO' and '0' key of a remote control unit.
The On Screen Display message ' ' will appear.
The Tray Lock has now been cleared.
A1-8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
• OWNER'S MANUAL
CAUTION ....................................................................................................................................
PREPARATION OF SERVICING ...............................................................................................
IMPORTANT SERVICE SAFETY INFORMATION ...................................................................
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS .....................................................................................................
WHEN REPLACING DVD DECK ...............................................................................................
TAPE REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY ............................................................
DISC REMOVAL METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY .............................................................
PARENTAL CONTROL-RATING LEVEL ..................................................................................
TRAY LOCK ................................................................................................................................
TABLE OF CONTENTS ..............................................................................................................
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS AND P. C. BOARDS ............................................
2. REMOVAL OF VCR DECK PARTS ...................................................................................
3. REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS ...................................................................................
4. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT PACKAGE IC ...............................................
KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS ........................................................................................................
SERVICE MODE LIST ................................................................................................................
PREVENTIVE CHECKS AND SERVICE INTERVALS ..............................................................
RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE ............................................................................................
WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC ..........................................................................
RF SIGNAL CHECK OF DVD PCB ............................................................................................
SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS .......................................................................................
PREPARATION FOR SERVICING .............................................................................................
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS ................................................................................................
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS ..................................................................................................
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ...................................................................................................
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
DVD ..........................................................................................................................................
Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP .................................................................................................
SYSTEM CONTROL ...............................................................................................................
OPERATION/DISPLAY ...........................................................................................................
Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR ............................................................................................................
TUNER/JACK ..........................................................................................................................
POWER ...................................................................................................................................
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS
DVD ..........................................................................................................................................
VCR .........................................................................................................................................
OPERATION 1/OPERATION 2/LOADING MOTOR/SW .......................................................
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
MPEG/MICON/DSP/RF_AMP ................................................................................................
MEMORY ................................................................................................................................
MOTOR DRIVE ......................................................................................................................
AUDIO/VIDEO ........................................................................................................................
Y/C/AUDIO/CCD/HEAD AMP ................................................................................................
SYSCON ..................................................................................................................................
TUNER/JACK ..........................................................................................................................
OPERATION/DISPLAY ...........................................................................................................
Hi-Fi/DEMODULATOR ............................................................................................................
POWER ...................................................................................................................................
OPERATION1,2 .......................................................................................................................
LOADING MOTOR/SW ...........................................................................................................
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ...............................................................................................
WAVEFORMS .............................................................................................................................
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW .............................................................................................
CHASSIS EXPLODED VIEW .....................................................................................................
DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW ...................................................................................................
MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST .........................................................................
CHASSIS REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ..................................................................................
DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ...............................................................................
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ...........................................................................
A1-1
A1-1
A1-2
A1-3~A1-5
A1-6
A1-7
A1-7
A1-8
A1-8
A2-1
A3-1~A3-7
B1-1, B1-2
B2-1~B2-6
B3-1~B3-4
B4-1, B4-2
C1-1, C1-2
C2-1
C3-1, C3-2
C4-1
C4-2
C4-3
D1-1
D1-1
D2-1~D2-4
D3-1, D3-2
E-1~E-33
F-1, F-2
F-3, F-4
F-5, F-6
F-7, F-8
F-9, F-10
F-11, F-12
F-13, F-14
G-1,G-2
G-3~G-6
G-7, G-8
H-1, H-2
H-3, H-4
H-5, H-6
H-7, H-8
H-9, H-10
H-11, H-12
H-13, H-14
H-15, H-16
H-17, H-18
H-19, H-20
H-21, H-22
H-23, H-24
H-25, H-26
I-1, I-2
J1-1, J1-2
J2-1, J2-2
J3-1
K1-1
K2-1
K3-1
K4-1~K4-15
A2-1
G-1
G-2
Outline of the product
DVD System
Color System
Disc
Disc Diameter
Drive
Search speed
Slow speed
G-3
G-4
G-5
G-6
G-7
G-8
VCR
System
Tuning
System
System
Video System
Hi-Fi STEREO
NTSC PB(PAL60Hz)
Deck
Heads Video Head
FM Audio Head
Audio / Control
Erase (Full Track Erase)
Tape
Speed
Erase (Normal Audio Track Erase)
Rec PAL
Play
NTSC
PAL
NTSC
Fast Forward / Rewind Time (Approx.) at 25oC
NTSC or PAL-M
PAL or SECAM
Forward/Reverse
Picture Search
Frame Advance
Slow Speed
Broadcasting System
Tuner and
Receive CH
System
Destination
CH Coverage
Power
Regulation
Temperature
Intermediate
Frequency
Picture (FP)
Sound (FS)
FP-FS
Preset CH
RF Converter Output
Channel
Level / Impedance
Sound Selector
Stereo / Dual TV Sound
Tuner Sound Muting
Power Source AC
DC
Power Consumption
Protector
Stand by
Per Year
Power Fuse
Safety Circuit
IC Protector(Micro Fuse)
Safety
Radiation
Laser
Operation
Storage
Operating Humidity
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
DVD VIDEO PLAYER & VHS Player / Recorder
NTSC
DVD, CD-DA, CD-R/RW, VIDEO CD,
SVCD, DVD-R/RW (VIDEO FORMAT ONLY)
120 mm , 80 mm
DM3PA
Fwd 4 steps
Actual 2-120 times (DVD)
4-40 times (CD)
Rev 4 steps
Actual 2-120 times (DVD)
4-40 times (CD)
Fwd 1/7-1/2 times
Actual --
Rev --
Actual --
VHS Player / Recorder
NTSC
Yes
No
OVD-7S
4Head
2Head
Mono/Yes
Yes
No
-
SP/SLP(EP)
-
SP/SLP(EP)
FF:1'48"/REW:1'48" with Cassette T-120
SP/LP/SLP(EP) = 3x,5x / 7x,9x / 9x,15x
-
Yes
1/10
US System M
1Tuner
US (w/CABLE)
2-69,4A,A-5~ A-1,A~I,
J~ W, W+1-W+84
45.75 MHz
41.25 MHz
4.50 MHz
-
Yes
3 or 4 ch
66 dBu / 75 Ohm
No
US-ST
Yes
120V 60Hz
-
18 W at 120V 60Hz
2 W at 120V 60Hz
-- W
Yes
Yes
No
UL/CSA
FCC/IC
DHHS
5oC - 40oC
-20oC - 60oC
Less than 80% RH
A3-1
G-9 Signal
Video Signal
RGB Signal
Audio Signal
Hi-Fi Audio Signal
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Output Level
S/N Ratio (Weighted)
Horizontal Resolution
Output Level
Input Level Microphone
Input Level Line
1 V p-p/75 ohm (DVD,VCR)
65 dB(DVD) 50 dB(VCR)
500 Lines (DVD) 230 Lines(VCR Mode)
-
-
-8 dBm/ 50k ohm (VCR, 0dBm=0.775Vrms)
Output Level Line
Digital Output Level
S/N Ratio at (Weighted)
-8 dBm/ 1k ohm (VCR, 0dBm=0.775Vrms)
-12dBm/ 1k ohm (DVD, -20dBFs 0dBFs=2.0Vrms)
0.5 V p-p / 75 ohm(DVD)
90dB(DVD), 42dB(VCR at SP)
Harmonic Distortion (1KHz) Typical
Frequency Response : DVD Mode at DVD
0.02% (1KHz) (DVD) , 1.5% (1KHz) (VCR)
4 Hz - 22 KHz
DVD Mode at VIDEO CD 4 Hz - 20 KHz
DVD Mode at CD 4 Hz - 20 KHz
VCR Mode at SP 100Hz - 10 KHz
VCR Mode at LP -
VCR Mode at SLP 100Hz - 4 KHz
Dynamic Range : More than 90dB
Frequency Response
Wow And Flutter : Less than
Channel Separation : More than
Harmonic Distortion : Less than
20Hz ~20kHz
0.01 %Wrms
60 dB
0.01
A3-2
G-10 On Screen
Display (DVD)
Menu
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Menu Type
Language
Menu
Subtitle
Audio
OSD Language (Set up Language)
Yes
Icon
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Video
Audio
E.B.L. (Enhanced Black Level)
TV Screen Size
OSD Display On/Off
Picture Mode(Video/File/Auto)
JPEG Interval
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
System
DRC (Dynamic Range Control)
Dialogue On:DRC(TV)/ Off:DRC(Std) dts Decode
Surround (Qsound)
Disc/Card Slot
Password Lock/Unlock
Parental (Rating Level)
Select Files
HDMI(480p/1080i/720p)
Output
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes (CD, VIDEO CD,SVCD MP3, WMA, JPEG )
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Progressive/Interlace
No
Yes
Yes
Open
Close
No disc
Reading
Play
Still/Pause
Stop
Prohibit Mark
Step
PBC
Skip (>>|)
Skip (|<<)
Random
Repeat
Slow+
Slow-
Search+ Yes
Search- Yes
Jump
Resume
Yes
Yes
Title No.
Chapter No.
Track No.
Time
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Subtitle No.
Angle No.
Yes
Yes
Vocal On/Off
Audio No.
Audio Stereo L/R
Zoom
Marker No.
Surround On/Off
Program Play Back
MP3/WMA/JPEG Folder Name
Yes
No
Yes (VIDEO CD, SVCD)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (CD, VIDEO CD, SVCD, MP3, WMA, JPEG )
Yes
File Name Yes
File No Yes
Time Yes (MP3, WMA)
Track No Yes
Progressive Scan Out ON/OFF No
A3-3
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
On Screen
Display(VCR)
G-11 OSD Language
G-12 Clock,Timer and Timer
Back-up
G-13 Display
Menu
Menu Type
Timer Rec Set
Auto Repeat On/Off
SAP On/Off
CH Set-Up
TV/CABLE
Auto CH Memory
Add/Delete
System Set Up
Clock Set
Language
No Noise Back Ground
Auto Clock
Standard Time
Yes
Character
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (Calendar 12H)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Daylight Saving Time
G-CODE(or SHOWVIEW or PLUSCODE)No. Entry
Stereo, Audio Output, SAP
Play/Stop/FF/Rew/Rec/OTR/Pause/Eject/Tape In/Repeat
(Symbol Mark)
CH/AV(LINE)
Clock
Repeat
Tape Counter
Index
Tape Speed
ATR / Manual Tracking
ZERO Return
Hi-Fi
Calendar
Timer Events
One Touch Recording Max Time
Timer Back-up (at Power Off Mode)
DISPLAY
DISPLAY type
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
English / French / Spanish
1990/1/1 ~ 2081/12/31
8 Program/ 1 Month
6 Hours
5sec
Yes
LED Module (Amber, "Rec" &Timer symbol = Red)
Clock/Counter,CH,Timer Rec,OTR, Play
Rec,FF(Cue),Rew(Rev),Stop,ATR,Eject
VCR
DVD
CD
Clock
Counter VCR
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (12h)
AM
PM
Yes
Yes (hour:min)
DVD Yes (hour:min)
CD Yes (min:sec)
Yes Eject
Counter Remain
Play
Stop
Yes
Rec
FF / Cue
REW / Review
Pause / Still
OTR (ITR)
T-Rec
Chapter
TITLE
TRACK
Repeat
Hi-Fi
SP
LP
SLP
CH
RF Output CH
Tape In
Remocon Custom Code
Progressive Scan Out
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
A3-4
G-14 Remote
Control
Unit
Glow in Dark Remocon
Remocon Format
Format
Custom Code
Power Source
Total Keys
Keys
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
RC-KU
Voltage(D.C)
UM size x pcs
3
4
5
1
2
Power
DISPLAY/CALL
8
9
6
7
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0
Input Select
Yes
Yes
Input Select / PROGRESSIVE
UP/ SET+ / TRACKING+
DOWN/ SET- / TRACKING-
LEFT/CH-
RIGHT/CH+
VCR/DVD
TV/VCR
DVD MENU(MENU)
TITLE (TOP MENU)
SETUP MENU/VCR MENU
SELECT/ENTER
CLEAR/CANCEL
RETURN
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PLAY Yes
STOP
PAUSE/STILL/STEP
FF(Cue)/SEARCH+
REW(Review)/SEARCH-
REC/OTR
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
TOSHIBA
TOSHIBA
45-BA
3V
UM-4 x 2 pcs
46 Key
Yes
Yes
SKIP+ / INDEX+
SKIP- / INDEX-
AUDIO / AUDIO SELECT
ANGLE/COUNTER RESET
SUBTITLE/ATR
PLAY MODE/SPEED
T-REC
CLOCK / COUNTER
JUMP/ZERO RETURN
ZOOM/CM SKIP
REPEAT A-B
SLOW (Forward)
MARKER
OPEN/CLOSE
EJECT
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
A3-5
G-15 Features
(DVD)
Features
(VCR)
G-16 Accessories
Auto Power Off
Video CD Playback
SVCD Playback
Overlay Graphics And Text
Command List
Entry Point Jump
MP3 Playback
WMA Playback
JPEG Playback
Progressive Scan Out
Digital Out
Down Mix Out
Dolby Digital
MPEG
PCM
DTS
(Dolby Digital)
(DTS)
Surround
Screen Saver
Tray Lock
Auto Stop
Audio DAC
Closed Caption signal in VBI (DVD Playback)
Auto Head Cleaning
Auto Power Off
Forward/Reverse Picture Search
VIDEO PLUS+ (SHOWVIEW, G-CODE)
One Touch Playback
Auto CH Memory
AREA CODE
Auto Clock Set
Index Search
SQPB
CATV
Energy Star
MTS (SAP)
CM Skip (30sec x 6 Times)
Copy (Disc to Tape)
Owner's Manual Language w/Guarantee Card
Remote Control Unit
Guarantee Card
Registration Card
Warning Sheet
Service Station List
Important Tag
AC Plug Adapter
Quick Set-up Sheet
Battery
UM size x pcs
AC Cord
AV Cord (1.2m)
75 Ohm Coaxial Cable (0.9m)
S-Video Cable
21pin cable
800 No Sticker
Toll Free Insert Sheet
Safety Tip
Sheet Information (Return)
Netflix Card
PVC Warning Sheet
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Qsound
Yes
Yes
No
192kHz / 24bit
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes (by Conditioning)
English/French
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
UM-4 x 2 pcs
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
A3-6
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
G-17 Interface
Switch Front
Rear
Power
Play
Eject (VCR)
Stop
Rec/OTR
Open/Close (DVD)
CH +
CH -
FF/ Search(>>)
Rew/Search(<<)
Still/Pause
Shuttle (Search/REV/FWD)
DVD/VCR
Main Power SW
Attenuator
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Terminals
Indicator
Front
Rear
LED
S-Video/Component Video Selector
RF Out (Slide SW)
Main Power SW
Video In
Audio In
Video Output
Audio Output
No
No
No
RCA x 1 (Black/Silver)
RCA x 2 (Stereo, Black/Silver)
RCA x1 (Yellow)
S-Video x 1 (DVD Signal Only)
Component x1 (RCA 3pin, DVD Signal Only)
RCA x 4(Stereo, Red/White)
Coaxial x 1 (Digital Audio, DVD Signal Only)
No
RCA x 1 (Yellow)
RCA x 2 (Stereo, Red/White)
Yes
Optical Out (Option)
Video Input (Option)
Audio Input (Option)
RF Input / Output
Euro Scart
AC Inlet
Power
Rec
T-Rec
TV/VCR
DVD
VCR
Surround
Level Meter
Yes (GREEN)
Yes (GREEN)
Approx. W x D x H (mm) 430 x 230 x 89.5
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
G-18 Set Size
G-19
G-20
Weight
Carton
Net (Approx.)
Gross (Approx.)
Master Carton
Content
Gift Box
Material
Dimensions W x D x H(mm)
Description of Origin
Material
3.5 kg( 7.7lbs)
4.5 kg( 9.9lbs)
--- Sets
--- / ---
---
---
Single / Full Color
No
W/Color Photo Label
Dimensions W x D x H(mm)
Description of Origin
497 x 340 x 174
Yes
No
G-21 Material
Drop Test
Container Stuffing
Cabinet
PCB
Height (cm)
Front
Non-Halogen Demand
Natural Dropping At 1 Corner / 3 Edges / 6 Surfaces
80 cm
2,015 Sets/40' container
PS 94V2 or More / DECABROM
No
Eyelet Demand No
G-22 Environment
Green Procurement of TOSHIBA No
Pb-free Phase3(Phase3A)
A3-7
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL PARTS
AND P.C. BOARDS
1-1: TOP CABINET, FRONT CABINET AND OPERATION
1/2 PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-1)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove the 5 screws
1
.
Remove the Top Cabinet in the direction of arrow (A).
Disconnect the following connectors:
(CP651 and CP652).
Unlock the 7 supports
2
.
Remove the Front Cabinet in the direction of arrow (B).
Remove the 9 screws
3
.
Remove the Operation 1/2 PCB in the direction of arrow
(C).
Top Cabinet
1
1
1-3: DVD DECK/DVD PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-3)
1.
2.
Short circuit the position shown in Fig. 1-3 using a soldering iron. If you remove the DVD Deck with no soldering, the Laser may be damaged.
Unlock the support
1
and remove the Deck Top Holder in the direction of arrow (A).
Remove the 2 screws
2
.
Remove the 2 screws
3
.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Disconnect the following connectors:
(CP501, CP8001).
Remove the DVD Deck in the direction of arrow (B).
Disconnect the following connectors:
8.
(CP2301, CP2302, CP2303).
Remove the 2 screws
4
.
9.
Remove the DVD PCB in the direction of arrow (C).
10.
Remove the 3 screws
5
.
11.
Remove the Front Angle in the direction of arrow (D).
1
4
1
DVD PCB
4
CP2303
CP652
(A)
2
Operation 1 PCB
2
3
3
3
3
3
(C)
2
2
2
2
(B)
3
3
3
3
CP651
(C)
2
Operation 2 PCB
Front Cabinet
1
Fig. 1-1
5
DVD Deck
Deck Top Holder
2
3
1
(A)
(B)
2
(C)
CP2302
CP2301
3
Short circuit using a soldering iron.
Pick Up PCB
5
1-2: FLAP (Refer to Fig. 1-2)
1.
2.
Open Flap to 90˚ and flex in direction of arrow (A), at the same time slide in direction of arrow (B).
Then lift in direction of arrow (C).
5
(D)
CP501
CP8001
Front Angle
Fig. 1-3
(C)
(B)
(A)
Flap
NOTE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Before your operation, please read “PREPARATION OF
SERVICING”.
Use the Lead Free solder.
Manual soldering conditions
• Soldering temperature: 320
±
20˚C
• Soldering time: Within 3 seconds
• Soldering combination: Sn-3.0Ag-0.5Cu
When Soldering/Removing of solder, use the drawing equipment over the Pick Up Unit to keep the Flux smoke away from it.
When installing the DVD Deck, remove all the soldering on the short circuit position after the connection of Pick Up
PCB and DVD PCB connector.
Fig. 1-2
B1-1
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
1-4: VCR DECK (Refer to Fig. 1-4)
NOTE
Do not remove the cable at the FE Head section. The FE
Head may be damaged if you remove the cable by force.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
7.
Remove the screw
1
.
Remove the FE Head.
Move the Cassette Holder Ass’y to the back side.
Remove the 2 screws
2
.
Remove the 2 screws
3
.
Disconnect the following connectors:
(CP101, CP102, CP3001).
Remove the VCR Deck in the direction of arrow.
1-5: VCR PCB (Refer to Fig. 1-5)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the screw
1
.
Remove the 5 screws
2
.
Remove the 2 screws
3
.
Remove the Shiel d
Jack.
Remove the VCR PCB in the direction of arrow.
3
3
VCR PCB
1
2
Shield Jack
1
FE Head
2
2
2
2
2
2
VCR Deck
Fig. 1-5
CP101
3
CP102
3
CP3001
Fig. 1-4
B1-2
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
2. REMOVAL OF VCR DECK PARTS
2-1: TOP BRACKET (Refer to Fig. 2-1)
1.
2.
Extend the 2 supports
1
.
Slide the 2 supports
2
and remove the Top Bracket.
NOTE
1. After installation of the Top Bracket, bend the support
1 so that the Top Bracket is fixed.
2-3: LINK UNIT (Refer to Fig. 2-3)
1.
2.
3.
Set the Link Unit to the Eject position.
Unlock the support
1
.
Remove the (A) side of the Link Unit first, then remove the (B) side.
Main Chassis
Link Unit
Top Bracket
1
1
(A)
Link Unit
(B)
1
Top Bracket
2
Main Chassis
2
Fig. 2-3
Main Chassis
Main Chassis
Fig. 2-1
2-4: LINK LEVER/FLAP LEVER (Refer to Fig. 2-4)
1.
2.
3.
Extend the support
1
.
Remove the Link Lever.
Remove the Flap Lever.
2-2: CASSETTE HOLDER ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 2-2)
1.
2.
3.
Move the Cassette Holder Ass'y to the front side.
Push the Locker R to remove the Cassette Side R.
Remove the Cassette Side L.
Locker R
Main Chassis Flap Lever
1
Cassette Side R
Link Lever
Fig. 2-4
Link Unit
Cassette Side L
Main Chassis
Fig. 2-2
B2-1
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
2-5: LOADING MOTOR/WORM (Refer to Fig. 2-5-A)
1.
2.
3.
Remove the screw
1
.
Remove the Loading Motor.
Remove the Worm.
Loading Motor
2-6: TENSION ASS’Y (Refer to Fig. 2-6-B)
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
Turn the Pinch Roller Cam clockwise so that the Tension
Holder hook is set to the position of Fig. 2-6-A to move the Tension Arm Ass’y.
Remove the Tension Spring.
Unlock the 2 supports
1
and remove the Tension Band.
Unlock the support
2
and remove the Tension Arm Ass’y.
Unlock the support
3
and remove the Tension Connect.
Float the hook
4
and turn it clockwise then remove the
Tension Holder.
Worm
Tension Arm Ass’y
Main Chassis
• Screw Torque: 3
±
0.5kgf•cm
1
Fig. 2-5-A
NOTE
1.
2.
3.
In case of the Worm installation, check if the value of the
Fig. 2-5-B is correct.
In case of the Loading Motor installation, hook the wire on the Cassette Opener as shown Fig. 2-5-C.
When installing the wires between Capstan DD Unit and
Loading Motor, connect them correctly as shown Fig. 2-5-D.
19.2
±
0.1mm
Fig. 2-6-A
Tension Connect
3
1
1
Tension Band
Tension Spring
2
4
Tension Holder
Tension Arm Ass’y
Loading Motor
-
+
Safety surface for pressing of the insert.
Pink
White
Fig. 2-5-B
Loading Motor
Cassette Opener
Fig. 2-5-C
Capstan DD Unit
L2
L1
Fig. 2-5-D
B2-2
Fig. 2-6-B
NOTE
1.
2.
3.
In case of the Tension Band installation, note the direction of the installation. (Refer to Fig. 2-6-C)
In case of the Tension Band installation, install correctly as Fig. 2-6-D.
In case of the Tension Connect installation, install as the circled section of Fig. 2-6-E.
Tension Connect
Tension Band
Fig. 2-6-C
[OK]
Tension Connect
[NG]
Tension Connect
Tension Connect
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
Tension Band
Tension Band
Fig. 2-6-D
NOTE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Take care not to damage the gears of the S Reel and T
Reel.
The Polyslider Washer may on the back of the reel.
Take care not to damage the shaft.
Do not touch section “A” of S Reel and T Reel. (Use gloves.) (Refer to Fig. 2-8-A) Touching may leave stains on section "A".
When you install the reel, clean the shaft and grease it. (If you do not grease, noise may be heard in FF/REW mode.)
After installing the reel, adjust the height of the reel.
(Refer to MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT)
Main Chassis
Fig. 2-6-E
2-7: T BRAKE ARM/T BRAKE BAND (Refer to Fig. 2-7-A)
1.
2.
3.
Remove the T Brake Spring.
Turn the T Brake Arm clockwise and bend the hook section to remove it.
Unlock the 2 supports
1
and remove the T Brake Band.
T Brake Band
1
1
Hook section
T Brake Arm
T Brake Spring
Fig. 2-7-A
NOTE
1. In case of the T Brake Band installation, install correctly as Fig. 2-7-B.
T Brake Arm
[OK]
T Brake Band
[NG]
T Brake Band
T Brake Arm
Fig. 2-7-B
2-8: S REEL/T REEL/IDLER ARM ASS’Y/IDLER GEAR
(Refer to Fig. 2-8-A)
1.
2.
3.
Remove the S Reel and T Reel.
Remove the 2 Polyslider Washers
1
.
Remove the Idler Arm Ass’y and Idler Gear.
B2-3
Idler Gear
S Reel
(B)
(A)
1
Idler Arm Ass’y
1
T Reel
(A)
Fig. 2-8-A
NOTE
1.
2.
In case of the S Reel and T Reel installation, check if the correct parts are installed. (Refer to Fig. 2-8-B)
In case of the Idler Arm Ass’y installation, install correctly as Fig. 2-8-C. And also set it so that the section “B” of
Fig. 2-8-A is placed under the Main Chassis tab.
[OK]
Clutch Gear
[NG]
Clutch Gear
Big Hole
(S Reel)
Small Hole
(T Reel) Fig. 2-8-B
Idler Arm Ass’y
Idler Arm Ass’y
Fig. 2-8-C
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
2-9: CASSETTE OPENER/PINCH ROLLER BLOCK/P5
ARM ASS’Y (Refer to Fig. 2-9-A)
1.
2.
Unlock the support
1
and remove the Cassette Opener.
Remove the Pinch Roller Block and P5 Arm Ass’y.
Cassette Opener
1
Pinch Roller Block
P5 Arm Ass’y
Main Chassis
Spring Position
Fig. 2-10-B
2-11: FE HEAD (RECORDER ONLY) (Refer to Fig. 2-11)
1.
2.
Remove the screw
1
.
Remove the FE Head.
1
FE Head
Fig. 2-9-A
NOTE
1.
2.
Do not touch the Pinch Roller. (Use gloves.)
In case of the Pinch Roller Block and the Pinch Roller
Cam installation, install correctly as Fig. 2-9-B.
Pinch Roller Block
P5 Arm Ass’y
Can be seen the hole of the Pinch Roller Cam.
Can be seen the hole of the
Main Cam.
Fig. 2-9-B
2-10: A/C HEAD (Refer to Fig. 2-10-A)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the screw
1
.
Remove the A/C Head Base.
Remove the 3 screws
2
.
Remove the A/C Head and A/C Head Spring.
NOTE
1.
2.
3.
Do not touch the A/C Head. (Use gloves.)
When you install the A/C Head Spring, install as shown in
Fig. 2-10-B.
When you install the A/C Head, tighten the screw (1) first, then tighten the screw (2), finally tighten the screw (3).
2
(2)
2
(1)
(3)
2
A/C Head
• Screw Torque: 5
±
0.5kgf•cm
• The FE Head is not installed on the Video Cassette Player.
Fig. 2-11
2-12: CYLINDER UNIT ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 2-12)
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect the following connector:
(CD2001).
Remove the 3 screws
1
.
Remove the Cylinder Unit Ass'y.
NOTE
1.
When you install the Cylinder Unit Ass'y, tighten the screws from (1) to (3) in order while pulling the Ass'y toward the left front direction.
CD2001
Cylinder Unit Ass'y
1
• Screw Torque: 5
±
0.5kgf•cm (Screw
1
)
A/C Head Spring
A/C Head Base
Fig. 2-10-A
B2-4
• Screw Torque: 3
±
0.5kgf•cm
(1)
1
(2)
1
1
(3)
Fig. 2-12
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
2-13: CAPSTAN DD UNIT (Refer to Fig. 2-13)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the Capstan Belt.
Remove the screw
1
.
Remove the Capstan Holder.
Remove the 3 screws
2
.
Remove the Capstan DD Unit.
NOTE
1. In case of the Pinch Roller Cam and Main Cam installation, install them as shown in the circled section of Fig. 2-
14-B so that the markers meet. (Refer to Fig. 2-14-B)
And also can be seen the Main Chassis hole through the
Main Cam maker hole.
1
Capstan Belt
Capstan Holder
Capstan DD Unit
Pinch Roller Cam
Marker
Main Cam
2
2
2
• Screw Torque: 4
±
0.5kgf•cm
Fig. 2-13
2-14: MAIN CAM/PINCH ROLLER CAM/JOINT GEAR
(Refer to Fig. 2-14-A)
1.
2.
Remove the E-Ring
1
, then remove the Main Cam.
Remove the E-Ring
2
, then remove the Pinch Roller
Cam and Joint Gear.
1
Main Cam
2
Pinch Roller Cam
Joint Gear
Fig. 2-14-B
2-15: LOADING GEAR S/T UNIT (Refer to Fig. 2-15-A)
1.
2.
Remove the E-Ring
1
and remove the Main Loading
Gear.
Remove the Main Rod, Tension Lever, Loading Arm S
Unit and Loading Arm T Unit.
1
Main Loading Gear
Main Rod
Loading Arm T Unit
Tension Lever
Loading Arm S Unit
Fig. 2-15-A
Fig. 2-14-A
B2-5
Main Loading Gear
Marker
Marker
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
NOTE
1. When you install the Loading Arm S Unit, Loading Arm T
Unit and Main Loading Gear, align each marker. (Refer
to Fig. 2-15-B)
2-17: CASSETTE GUIDE POST/INCLINED BASE S/T
UNIT/P4 CAP/LED REFLECTOR
(Refer to Fig. 2-17-A)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the P4 Cap.
Unlock the support
1
and remove the Cassette Guide
Post.
Remove the Inclined Base S/T Unit.
Remove the screw
2
.
Remove the LED Reflector.
Cassette Guide Post
1
Inclined Base S Unit
Inclined Base T Unit
Loading Arm T Unit Loading Arm S Unit
Fig. 2-15-B
2-16: CLUTCH ASS’Y/RING SPRING/CLUTCH LEVER/
CLUTCH GEAR (Refer to Fig. 2-16-A)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the Polyslider Washer
1
.
Remove the Clutch Ass’y and Ring Spring.
Remove the Clutch Lever.
Remove the Coupling Gear, Coupling Spring and Clutch
Gear.
1
Clutch Ass’y
Ring Spring
Coupling Gear
Coupling Spring
Clutch Gear
Clutch Lever
LED Reflector
P4 Cap
2
Fig. 2-17-A
NOTE
1.
2.
3.
Do not touch the roller of Guide Roller.
In case of the P4 Cap installation, install it with parallel for “A” and “B” of Fig. 2-17-B.
In case of the Cassette Guide Post installation, install correctly as the circled section of Fig. 2-17-C.
“A” “B”
P4 Cap
Fig. 2-16-A
NOTE
1. In case of the Clutch Ass’y installation, install it with inserting the spring of the Clutch Ass’y into the dent of the
Coupling Gear. (Refer to Fig. 2-16-B)
Clutch Ass’y
[OK]
Cassette Guide Post
[NG]
Cassette Guide Post
Cassette Opener
Fig. 2-17-B
Coupling Gear
Fig. 2-16-B
B2-6
Fig. 2-17-C
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
3. REMOVAL OF DVD DECK PARTS
NOTE
1. Disassemble only the DVD DECK PARTS parts listed here. Minute adjustments are needed if the disassembly is done. If the repair is needed except listed parts, replace the DVD MECHA ASS'Y.
3-1: TRAY (Refer to Fig. 3-1-A)
1.
2.
Set the Tray opened. (Refer to the DISC REMOVAL
METHOD AT NO POWER SUPPLY)
Unlock the 2 supports
1
and remove the Tray.
3-2: MAIN CHASSIS ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 3-2-A)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the screw
1
.
Unlock the 2 supports
2
.
Remove the Insulator (R) from the Main Frame Ass'y.
Remove the Main Chassis Ass'y.
Main Frame Ass'y
2
1
2
Main Frame Ass'y
Insulator (R)
Main Chassis Ass'y
Tray
1
1
Fig. 3-1-A
NOTE
1. In case of the Tray installation, install them as the circled section of Fig. 3-1-B so that the each markers are met.
Main Frame Ass'y
• Screw Torque: 2.0
±
0.3kgf•cm Fig. 3-2-A
NOTE
1.
In case of the Main Chassis Ass'y, install it from (1) to (4) in order. (Refer to Fig. 3-2-B)
2.
In case of the Main Chassis Ass'y installation, hook the wire on the Main Frame Ass'y as shown Fig. 3-2-C.
Main Frame Ass'y (Bottom Side)
(3)
(2)
(3)
Rack Loading
(3)
Traverse Holder
(1)
Main Chassis Ass'y
Tray
Fig. 3-1-B
(4)
(4)
Check Lock
Main Frame Ass'y
Fig. 3-2-B
Check Hook
Fig. 3-2-C
B3-1
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
3-3: LOADING MOTOR PCB ASS'Y/ LOADING BELT
(Refer to Fig. 3-3-A)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the Loading Belt.
Remove the screw
1
.
Remove the 2 screws
2
.
Remove the Loading Motor PCB Ass'y.
Remove the Pulley Gear.
3-4: RACK LOADING/MAIN GEAR/PULLEY GEAR
(Refer to Fig. 3-4-A)
1.
2.
3.
Press down the catcher
1
and slide the Rack Loading.
Unlock the support
2
and remove the Pulley Gear.
Remove the Main Gear.
Loading Belt
2
2
Pulley Gear
Main Gear
Rack Loading
Main Frame Ass’y
Pulley Gear
Loading Motor PCB Ass’y
1
• Screw Torque: 2.5
±
0.3kgf•cm (Screw
1
)
• Screw Torque: 1.0
±
0.3kgf•cm (Screw
2
)
Fig. 3-3-A
NOTE
1.
2.
3.
In case of the Pulley Motor installation, check if the value of the Fig. 3-3-B is correct.
When installing the Loading Motor PCB Ass'y, install it correctly as Fig. 3-3-C.
In case of the Loading Motor PCB Ass'y installation, hook the wire on the Main Frame Ass'y as shown Fig. 3-3-C.
Main Frame Ass’y
2
1
Fig. 3-4-A
NOTE
1. In case of the Rack Loading installation, do not mesh it to the Main Gear as shown the Fig. 3-4-B.
Rack Loading
Check Hook
Pulley Motor
Loading Motor
7.0
±
0.1mm
Main Gear
Fig. 3-4-B
3-5: CLAMPER ASS'Y (Refer to Fig. 3-5-A)
1.
2.
Press the Clamper and rotate the Clamper Plate clockwise, then unlock the 3 supports
1
.
Remove the Clamper Plate, Clamper Magnet and
Clamper.
Clamper Plate
Clamper Magnet
Rack Loading
Safety surface for pressing of the insert.
The Lever should be position between A and B.
A B
Fig. 3-3-B
Main Frame
1
1
1
Clamper
Fig. 3-5-A
Check Hook Loading Motor PCB Ass’y
Fig. 3-3-C
B3-2
Clamper Plate
Clamper
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
NOTE
1. In case of the Clamper Ass'y installation, install correctly as Fig. 3-5-B.
No gap
3-7: SWITCH PCB ASS'Y/MIDDLE GEAR/FEED MOTOR
(Refer to Fig. 3-7-A)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove the screw
1
.
Remove the Switch PCB Ass'y.
Unlock the support
2
.
Remove the Middle Gear.
Remove the 2 screws
3
.
Remove the Feed Motor.
Remove the Motor Gear.
1
Fig. 3-5-B
Switch PCB Ass'y
3
3
Middle Gear
3-6: TRAVERSE HOLDER/INSULATOR (F)/INSULATOR
(R) (Refer to Fig. 3-6-A)
1.
2.
3.
Remove the Traverse Holder.
Remove the 2 Insulator (F).
Remove the Insulator (R).
Main Chassis Ass'y
Insulator (F)
Traverse Holder
Insulator (F)
Insulator (R)
2
Motor Gear
Main Chassis Ass'y
• Screw Torque: 3.0
±
0.3kgf•cm (Screw
1
)
• Screw Torque: 1.5
±
0.3kgf•cm (Screw
3
)
Feed Motor
Fig. 3-7-A
NOTE
1.
2.
3.
In case of the Motor Gear installation, check if the value of the Fig. 3-7-B is correct.
When installing the wire of the Switch PCB Ass'y, install it correctly as Fig. 3-7-C.
After the assembly of the Main Chassis Ass'y, hook the wire on the Main Chassis Ass'y as shown Fig. 3-7-D.
Fig. 3-6-A
NOTE
1.
2.
In case of the Insulator (F) installation, install correctly as
Fig. 3-6-B.
In case of the Insulator (R) installation, install correctly as
Fig. 3-6-C.
Insulator (F)
Motor Gear
Feed Motor
6.0
±
0.2mm
Traverse Holder
Safety surface for pressing of the insert.
Fig. 3-7-B
Fig. 3-6-B
Insulator (R)
Main Chassis Ass'y (Top Side)
• Install wire from (1) to (4) in order.
~ SPINDLE MOTOR ~
YELLOW (2)
GREEN (1)
~ FEED MOTOR ~
ORANGE (4)
BLUE (3)
Fig. 3-6-C
Switch PCB Ass'y
Fig. 3-7-C
B3-3
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
Main Chassis Ass'y (Bottom Side)
Check Hook
Check Hook
Check Hook
[ 6 pin FFC ]
(1)
Reinforcement Plate
(3)
53
±
1mm
Printing Surface
Fold
(4)
(2)
10
±
1mm
Printing Surface
Fold
Reinforcement Plate
10
±
1mm
Printing Surface
Fold
Reinforcement Plate
Fold
Printing Surface
52
±
1mm
• Proceed the steps (1) through (4).
Fig. 3-8-C
Check Hook
• Loosen the wire in the direction of the arrow.
Fig. 3-7-D
3-8: FFC WIRE HANDLING
1.
When installing the FFC, fold it correctly and install it as shown from Fig. 3-8-A to Fig. 3-8-C.
NOTE
1.
Do not make the folding lines except the specified positions for the FFC.
[ 24 pin FFC ]
50
±
1mm
Fold back at the border line of the reinforcement plate.
Fold
73
±
1mm
10mm
Fold it by 90˚
117
±
1mm
Double Sided Tape
Fig. 3-8-A
[ 5 pin FFC ]
(1)
Reinforcement Plate
(3)
55
±
1mm
Printing Surface
Fold
(4)
(2)
10
±
1mm
Printing Surface
Fold
Reinforcement Plate
10
±
1mm
Printing Surface
Fold
Reinforcement Plate
Fold
Printing Surface
60
±
1mm
• Proceed the steps (1) through (4).
Fig. 3-8-B
B3-4
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
4. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF FLAT
PACKAGE IC
REMOVAL
1. Put Masking Tape (cotton tape) around the Flat Package
IC to protect other parts from any damage.
(Refer to Fig. 4-1.)
NOTE
Masking is carried out on all the parts located within
10 mm distance from IC leads.
3. When IC starts moving back and forth easily after desoldering completely, pickup the corner of the IC using a tweezers and remove the IC by moving with the IC desoldering machine. (Refer to Fig. 4-3.)
NOTE
Some ICs on the PCB are affixed with glue, so be careful not to break or damage the foil of each IC leads or solder lands under the IC when removing it.
Blower type IC desoldering machine
IC
Masking Tape
(Cotton Tape)
Tweezers
Fig. 4-1
2. Heat the IC leads using a blower type IC desoldering machine. (Refer to Fig. 4-2.)
NOTE
Do not rotate or move the IC back and forth , until IC can move back and forth easily after desoldering the leads completely.
Blower type IC desoldering machine
IC
Fig. 4-3
4.
5.
Peel off the Masking Tape.
Absorb the solder left on the pattern using the Braided
Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 4-4.)
NOTE
Do not move the Braided Shield Wire in the vertical direction towards the IC pattern.
IC
Fig. 4-2
Braided Shield Wire
Soldering Iron
IC pattern
Fig. 4-4
B4-1
INSTALLATION
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
4. When bridge-soldering between terminals and/or the soldering amount are not enough, resolder using a Thintip Soldering Iron. (Refer to Fig. 4-8.)
1. Take care of the polarity of new IC and then install the new IC fitting on the printed circuit pattern. Then solder each lead on the diagonal positions of IC temporarily.
(Refer to Fig. 4-5.)
IC
Thin-tip Soldering Iron
Soldering Iron
Solder temporarily Solder temporarily
Fig. 4-5
2. Supply the solder from the upper position of IC leads sliding to the lower position of the IC leads.
(Refer to Fig. 4-6.)
Fig. 4-8
5. Finally, confirm the soldering status on four sides of the
IC using a magnifying glass.
Confirm that no abnormality is found on the soldering position and installation position of the parts around the
IC. If some abnormality is found, correct by resoldering.
NOTE
When the IC leads are bent during soldering and/or repairing, do not repair the bending of leads. If the bending of leads are repaired, the pattern may be damaged. So, always be sure to replace the IC in this case.
Soldering Iron
Solder
IC
Supply soldering from upper position to lower position
Fig. 4-6
3. Absorb the solder left on the lead using the Braided
Shield Wire. (Refer to Fig. 4-7.)
NOTE
Do not absorb the solder to excess.
Soldering Iron
IC
Braided Shield Wire
Fig. 4-7
B4-2
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A/C
ACC
AE
AFC
AFT
AFT DET
AGC
AMP
ANT
A.PB
APC
ASS'Y
AT
AUTO
A/V
BGP
BOT
BPF
BRAKE SOL
BUFF
B/W
C
CASE
CAP
CARR
CH
CLK
CLOCK (SY-SE)
COMB
CONV
CPM
CTL
CYL
CYL-M
CYL SENS
DATA (SY-CE) dB
EOT
EQ
EXT
F
FBC
FE
FF
FG
FL SW
FM
DC
DD Unit
DEMOD
DET
DEV
E
EF
EMPH
ENC
ENV
FSC
FWD
GEN
GND
Audio/Control
Automatic Color Control
Audio Erase
Automatic Frequency Control
Automatic Fine Tuning
Automatic Fine Tuning Detect
Automatic Gain Control
Amplifier
Antenna
Audio Playback
Automatic Phase Control
Assembly
All Time
Automatic
Audio/Video
Burst Gate Pulse
Beginning of Tape
Bandpass Filter
Brake Solenoid
Buffer
Black and White
Capacitance, Collector
Cassette
Capstan
Carrier
Channel
Clock
Clock (Syscon to Servo)
Combination, Comb Filter
Converter
Capstan Motor
Control
Cylinder
Cylinder-Motor
Cylinder-Sensor
Data (Syscon to Servo)
Decibel
Direct Current
Direct Drive Motor Unit
Demodulator
Detector
Deviation
Emitter
Emitter Follower
Emphasis
Encoder
Envelope
End of Tape
Equalizer
External
Fuse
Feed Back Clamp
Full Erase
Fast Forward, Flip-flop
Frequency Generator
Front Loading Switch
Frequency Modulation
Frequency Sub Carrier
Forward
Generator
Ground
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS
I
H
K
L
M
N
O
P
R
S
MINI
MIX
MM
MOD
MPX
MS SW
NC
NR
OSC
OPE
PB
PB CTL
PB-C
PB-Y
PCB
P. CON
PD
PG
P-P
R
H.P.F
H.SW
Hz
IC
IF
IND
INV
KIL
L
LED
LIMIT AMP
LM, LDM
LP
L.P.F
LUMI.
M
MAX
REC
REC-C
REC-Y
REEL BRK
REEL S
REF
REG
REW
REV, RVS
RF
RMC
RY
S. CLK
S. COM
S. DATA
SEG
SEL
SENS
SER
SI
SIF
SO
SOL
SP
C1-1
High Pass Filter
Head Switch
Hertz
Integrated Circuit
Intermediate Frequency
Indicator
Inverter
Killer
Left
Light Emitting Diode
Limiter Amplifier
Loading Motor
Long Play
Low Pass Filter
Luminance
Motor
Maximum
Minimum
Mixer, mixing
Monostable Multivibrator
Modulator, Modulation
Multiplexer, Multiplex
Mecha State Switch
Non Connection
Noise Reduction
Oscillator
Operation
Playback
Playback Control
Playback-Chrominance
Playback-Luminance
Printed Circuit Board
Power Control
Phase Detector
Pulse Generator
Peak-to Peak
Right
Recording
Recording-Chrominance
Recording-Luminance
Reel Brake
Reel Sensor
Reference
Regulated, Regulator
Rewind
Reverse
Radio Frequency
Remote Control
Relay
Serial Clock
Sensor Common
Serial Data
Segment
Select, Selector
Sensor
Search Mode
Serial Input
Sound Intermediate Frequency
Serial Output
Solenoid
Standard Play
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
S
T
U
V
X
Y
STB
SW
SYNC
SYNC SEP
TR
TRAC
TRICK PB
TP
UNREG
V
VCO
VIF
VP
V.PB
VR
V.REC
VSF
VSR
VSS
V-SYNC
VT
X'TAL
Y/C
KEY TO ABBREVIATIONS
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Serial Strobe
Switch
Synchronization
Sync Separator, Separation
Transistor
Tracking
Trick Playback
Test Point
Unregulated
Volt
Voltage Controlled Oscillator
Video Intermediate Frequency
Vertical Pulse, Voltage Display
Video Playback
Variable Resistor
Video Recording
Visual Search Fast Forward
Visual Search Rewind
Voltage Super Source
Vertical-Synchronization
Voltage Tuning
Crystal
Luminance/Chrominance
C1-2
SERVICE MODE LIST
This unit is provided with the following SERVICE MODES so you can repair, examine and adjust easily.
To enter to the SERVICE MODE function, press and hold both buttons simultaneously on the main unit or on the main unit and on the remote control for more than a standard time in the appropriate condition. (See below chart.)
In case of the main unit and remote control, press the remote control buttons first, then press the main unit buttons.
Set
Condition
Set Key Set Key
Standard
Time
Operations
PLAY/REC total hours are displayed on the TV Monitor.
Refer to the “PREVENTIVE CHECKS AND SERVICE INTERVALS”
(CONFIRMATION OF HOURS USED).
VCR mode CH UP FF 2 sec.
VCR mode
VCR mode
(Playback)
Power Off
CH UP
CH UP
CH DOWN
PLAY
STOP
POWER
2 sec.
2 sec.
2 sec.
Can be checked of the INITIAL DATA of MEMORY IC.
Refer to the “WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC”.
Initialization of factory VCR data.
NOTE: Do not use this for normal servicing.
If you set factory initialization, the memories are reset such as the clock setting, the channel setting, and PLAY/REC total hours.
Adjust the PG SHIFTER automatically.
Refer to the “ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT”.
VCR operation mode at no connection of DVD.
Refer to the “PREPARATION FOR SERVICING”
NOTE: Although the DVD is connected, the DVD mode cannot be selected.
Set
Condition
DVD mode
(No disc)
DVD mode
(Stop)
DVD mode
(Stop)
DVD mode
(No disc)
Set Key
REC
REC
STOP
STOP
Method
Press the following remocon keys continuously.
SETUP SUBTITLE 3
AUDIO 0
Press the ATR button on the remote control for more than
2 seconds during PLAY.
Make the short circuit between the test point of
SERVICE and the GND.
Remocon
Key
4
6
1
7
Standard
Time
2 sec.
2 sec.
3 sec.
3 sec.
Operations
Initialization of factory DVD data.
NOTE: Do not use this for normal servicing.
This function will only work without the setting of DVD disc at
DVD mode.
DVD Write mode.
Refer to the “RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE”.
NOTE: Do not use this for the normal servicing.
Check for the firmware version.
Refer to the “RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE”.
NOTE: Do not use this for the normal servicing.
Releasing of PARENTAL LOCK.
Refer to the “PARENTAL CONTROL - RATING LEVEL”.
NOTE: The function will only work without the setting of DVD disc at DVD mode.
C2-1
Operations
Tray cannot be opened.
Refer to the “TRAY LOCK”.
NOTE: No indications on the screen when the Tray Lock is setting.
Adjusting of the Tracking to the center position.
Refer to the “MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT” (GUIDE ROLLER) and “ELECTRICAL
ADJUSTMENT” (PG SHIFTER).
The BOT, EOT, and the Reel Sensor do not work and the VCR deck can be operated without a cassette tape.
Refer to the “PREPARATION FOR SERVICING”
PREVENTIVE CHECKS AND SERVICE INTERVALS
The following standard table depends on environmental conditions and usage.
Parts replacing time does not mean the life span for individual parts.
Also, long term storage or misuse may cause transformation and aging of rubber parts.
The following list means standard hours, so the checking hours depends on the conditions.
Time
Parts Name
Audio Control Head
Full Erase Head
(Recorder only)
Capstan Belt
Pinch Roller
Capstan DD Unit
Loading Motor
Tension Band
T Brake Band
Clutch Ass’y
Idler Arm Ass’y
Capstan Shaft
Tape Running
Guide Post
Cylinder Unit
500 hours
1,000 hours
1,500 hours
2,000 hours
2,500 hours
Notes
Clean those parts in contact with the tape.
Clean the rubber, and parts which the rubber touches.
: Clean
: Check it and if necessary, replace it.
CONFIRMATION OF HOURS USED
PLAY/REC total hours can be checked on the screen.
Total hours are displayed in 16 system of notation.
NOTE: If you set a factory initialization, the total hours is reset to “0”.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect the set to TV Monitor.
Turn on the POWER, and set to the VCR mode.
Press both CH UP button on the set and the FF button on the set for more than 2 seconds.
The Fig. 1 screen will appear on TV Monitor.
After the confirmation of using hours, turn off the power.
Replace when rolling becomes abnormal.
Clean the Head
INIT 00 0E
PLAY/REC 0010
Fig. 1
Initial setting content of MEMORY IC.
PLAY/REC total hours.
= (16 x 16 x 16 x thousands digit value)
+ (16 x 16 x hundreds digit value)
+ (16 x tens digit value)
+ (ones digit value)
C3-1
PREVENTIVE CHECKS AND SERVICE INTERVALS
CLEANING
NOTE
After cleaning the heads with isopropyl alcohol, do not run a tape until the heads dry completely. If the heads are not completely dry and alcohol gets on the tape, damage may occur.
1. AUDIO CONTROL HEAD
Clean the Audio Control Head with the cotton stick soaked by alcohol. Clean the full erase head in the same manner. (Refer to the figure below.)
2. TAPE RUNNING SYSTEM
When cleaning the tape transport system, use the gauze moistened with isopropyl alcohol.
3. CYLINDER
Wrap a piece of chamois around your finger. Dip it in isopropyl alcohol. Hold it to the cylinder head softly.
Turn the cylinder head counterclockwise to clean it (in the direction of the arrow). (Refer to the figure below.)
NOTE
Do not exert force against the cylinder head. Do not move the chamois upward or downward on the head.
Use the chamois one by one.
Audio Control Head
Cylinder Head
C3-2
RE-WRITE FOR DVD FIRMWARE
1.
Turn on the power, and set the DVD mode.
2.
Confirm that the ìNo Discî will be appeared on the screen.
3.
Open the DVD tray.
4.
Press both Channel button (6) on the remote control and the REC button on the set for more than 2 seconds.
5.
Press OPEN/CLOSE button on the unit to check if all the keys on the unit do not function.
NOTE: To check if DVD Write mode is set.
When inserting Up-Date Disc at Non DVD Write mode, the read error will happen.
6.
Place the Up-Date Disc and close the tray by hand. (Refer to SERVICING FIXTURE AND TOOLS)
7.
Automatic read will start and "CD-R UPDATE PROCESS" will be displayed on the screen.
At this time, the horizontal noise lines may appear. But no problem.
8.
Approxi. 20 seconds later, the tray will open automatically. Remove the Up-Date Disc.
9.
Then, Approxi. 40 seconds later, the above indication will disappear and the tray will close automatically.
When the "No Disc" appears on the screen, the write will end.
NOTE: Do not turn off the unit or push the tray by hand to close it.
Up-Date error will happen and can not be done with the Up-Date of Up-Date Disc.
10.
Unplug the AC cord, then plug it in.
11.
After the write, set to the initializing of shipping.
Set to the DVD mode, press both Channel button (4) on the remote control and the REC button on the set for more than
2 seconds.
12.
The "INITIALIZE 5 ---> COMPLETE" will appear on the screen.
Then unplug the AC cord, and plug it in.
13.
CHECK FOR THE FIRMWARE VERSION
Set to the DVD mode, press both Channel button (1) on the remote control and the STOP button on the set for more than
3 seconds.
Firmware version will be displayed on the top left of the screen.
No Disc
PLA5216A
P L A 5 2 1 6 A
14.
Fixed
Released times on the same date
Release date (Example: 2005.2.16)
When the changed version displays, the Re-write will be completed.
Turn off the power
A = October
B = November
C = December
C4-1
WHEN REPLACING EEPROM (MEMORY) IC
If a service repair is undertaken where it has been required to change the MEMORY IC, the following steps should be taken to ensure correct data settings while making reference to TABLE 1.
NOTE: INI 32 and INI 33 cannot be set. Because, the total time for the PLAY/REC of the main unit is recorded.
INIT +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +A +B +C +D +E +F
00
0E 22 9E 60 64 64 4A 86 0B 2B 86 32 0A C8 0A 01
10
AF 97 95 8A 00 00 31 04 88 A5 9F 3A 00 10 BF 00
20 3A 11 22 70 61 29 3A 00 0B 00 40 C5 9A B0 00 37
30
03 17 -----------------------------
Table 1
1.
2.
3.
Connect the set to TV Monitor.
Turn on the POWER, and set to the VCR mode.
Press both CH UP button on the set and the FF button on the set for more than 2 seconds.
ADDRESS and DATA will appear on TV Monitor as Fig 1.
ADDRESS DATA
INIT 00 0E
PLAY/REC 0010
Fig. 1
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
ADDRESS is now selected and should “blink”. Using the SET + or - button on the remote, step through the ADDRESS until required ADDRESS to be changed is reached.
Press ENTER to select DATA. When DATA is selected, it will ìblinkî.
Again, step through the DATA using SET + or - button until required DATA value has been selected.
Pressing ENTER will take you back to ADDRESS for further selection if necessary.
Repeat steps 4 to 7 until all data has been checked.
When satisfied correct DATA has been entered, turn POWER off (return to STANDBY MODE) to finish DATA input.
After the data input, set to the initializing of shipping.
10.
Turn on the POWER, and set to the VCR mode.
11.
Press both CH UP button on the set and the PLAY button on the set for more than 2 seconds.
12.
After the finishing of the initializing of shipping, the unit will turn off automatically.
The unit will now have the correct DATA for the new MEMORY IC.
C4-2
RF SIGNAL CHECK OF DVD PCB
RF signal check can be done at the following A~D resistance points on the DVD PCB.
DVD PCB (BOTTOM SIDE)
Q2303
R2356
Q2304
R2359
Q2305
B
F
R2309
D4004
D4002
W836
R4042
R4016
R2329
R2323
D
E
C
A
D4003
DME031A
R4036
R4037
W811
R4057
C4-3
Alignment Tape
ST-N5
ST-NF
VTR cleaning kit
SERVICING FIXTURES AND TOOLS
Back tension cassette gauge Torque cassette gauge
(KT-300NR)
Taper nut driver
70909103
VTR lubrication kit
70909199
Grease
70909228
JG002B
JG002E
Adapter
Dial Torque Gauge
(10~90gf•cm)
JG002F (60~600gf•cm)
JG022 Master Plane JG024A Reel Disk Height
Adjustment Jig
JG153 X Value Adjustment
Screwdriver
JG154 Cable
JG176 Up-Date Disc JG185 Tentelometer
Ref. No.
JG002B
JG002E
JG002F
JG022
JG024A
JG153
JG154
JG176
JG185
Part No.
APJG002B00
APJG002E00
APJG002F00
APJG022000
APJG024A00
APJG153000
APJG154000
APJG176064
APJG185000
Parts Name
Adapter
Dial Torque Gauge (10~90gf•cm)
Dial Torque Gauge (60~600gf•cm)
Master Plane
Reel Disk Height Adjustment Jig
X Value Adjustment Screwdriver
Cable
Up-Date Disc
Tentelometer
Remarks
VSR Torque, Brake Torque (S Reel/T Reel Ass'y)
Brake Torque (T Reel Ass'y)
VSR Torque, Brake Torque (S Reel)
Reel Disk Height Adjustment
Reel Disk Height Adjustment
X Value Adjustment
Used to connect the test point of SERVICE and GROUND
Up-Date of the Firmware
Confirmation of Tape Tension on Playback
PREPARATION FOR SERVICING
How to use the Servicing Fixture
1.
2.
3.
While pressing the CH DOWN button on the set for more than 2 seconds, press the POWER button on the set simultaneously at the Power OFF. Although the DVD is connected, the DVD mode cannot be selected.
Short circuit between TP3001 and Ground with the cable JG154.
(The BOT, EOT, and the Reel Sensor do not work and the VCR deck can be operated without a cassette tape.)
In case of using a cassette tape, press the STOP/EJECT button to insert or eject a cassette tape.
Turn on the power and re-check the cable before checking the trouble points.
When you servicing with connection of DVD, perform the operations above step 2 to step 3.
D1-1
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS
1. CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT
Read the following NOTES before starting work.
• Place an object which weighs between 450g~500g on the
Cassette Tape to keep it steady when you want to make the tape run without the Cassette Holder. (Do not place an object which weighs over 500g.)
1-1: CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF REEL DISK
HEIGHT
1.
2.
Turn on the power and set to the STOP mode.
Set the master plane (JG022) and reel disk height adjustment jig (JG024A) on the mechanism framework, taking care not to scratch the drum, as shown in Fig. 1-1-
3.
A.
While turning the reel and confirm the following points.
Check if the surface "A" of reel disk is lower than the surface "B" of reel disk height adjustment jig (JG024A) and is higher than the surface "C". If it is not passed, place the height adjustment washers and adjust to 10(+2,
-0)mm.
4.
Adjust the other reel in the same way.
1-2: CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF TENSION
POST POSITION
1.
2.
Set to the PLAY mode.
Adjust the adjusting section for the Tension Arm position so that the Tension Arm top is within the standard line of
Main Chassis.
3.
While turning the S Reel clockwise, confirm that the edge of the Tension Arm is located in the position described above.
Standard line of Main Chassis
Tension Arm
0.5mm (Adjusting range)
Adjusting section for the
Tension Arm position
Fig. 1-2-A
Master Plane (JG022)
Tension Band
Reel Disk Height Adjustment Jig
(JG024A)
Fig. 1-1-A
Master Plane (JG022)
Reel Disk
Reel Disk Height
Adjustment Jig
(JG024A)
(B)
10(+0.2, -0)mm
Height Adjustment
Washer
2.6x4.7xT0.13
2.6X4.7xT0.25
(A)
(C)
The Tension Arm top will move to the inside direction of the Main Chassis.
Bend
The Tension Arm top will move to the outside direction of the Main Chassis.
Fig. 1-2-B
1-3: CONFIRMATION OF PLAYBACK TORQUE AND
BACK TENSION TORQUE DURING PLAYBACK
1.
Load a video tape (T-120) recorded in standard speed mode.
Set the unit to the PLAY mode.
2.
Install the tentelometer (JG185) as shown in Fig. 1-3. Confirm that the meter indicates 20
±
2gf in the beginning of playback.
• USING A CASSETTE TYPE TORQUE TAPE (KT-300NR)
1.
After confirmation and adjustment of Tension Post position (Refer to item 1-2), load the cassette type torque tape (KT-300NR) and set to the PLAY mode.
2.
Confirm that the right meter of the torque tape indicates
50~90gf•cm during playback in SP mode.
3.
Confirm that the left meter of the torque tape indicates
25~40gf•cm during playback in SP mode.
Tentelometer
(JG185)
Video Tape
Fig. 1-1-B
P1 Post
Guide Roller
Fig. 1-3
D2-1
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS
1-4: CONFIRMATION OF VSR TORQUE
1.
Install the Torque Gauge (JG002F) and Adapter (JG002B) on the S Reel. Set to the Picture Search (Rewind) mode.
(Refer to Fig.1-4-B)
2.
Then, confirm that it indicates 120~180gf•cm.
NOTE
Install the Torque Gauge on the reel disk firmly. Press the
REW button to turn the reel disk.
NOTE
If the torque is out of the range, replace the following parts.
Check item
1-4
1-5
Replacement Part
Idler Ass'y/Clutch Ass'y
S Reel side: S Reel/Tension Band/Tension
T Reel side:
Connect/Tension Arm Ass'y
T Reel/T Brake Band//T Brake
Spring/T Brake Arm
1-5: CONFIRMATION OF REEL BRAKE TORQUE
(S Reel Brake) (Refer to Fig. 1-4-B)
1.
Once set to the Fast Forward mode then set to the Stop mode. While, unplug the AC cord when the Pinch Roller
Block is on the position of Fig. 1-4-A.
2.
Move the Idler Ass'y from the S Reel.
3.
Install the Torque Gauge (JG002F) and Adapter
(JG002B) on the S Reel. Turn the Torque Gauge
(JG002F) clockwise.
4.
Then, confirm that it indicates 60~100gf•cm.
(T Reel Brake) (Refer to Fig. 1-4-B)
1.
Once set to the Fast Forward mode then set to the Stop mode. While, unplug the AC cord when the Pinch Roller
Block is on the position of Fig. 1-4-A.
2.
Move the Idler Ass'y from the T Reel.
3.
Install the Torque Gauge (JG002E) and Adapter
(JG002B) on the T reel. Turn the Torque Gauge
(JG002E) counterclockwise.
4.
Then, confirm that it indicates 30~50gf•cm.
The position at
STOP mode.
Capstan DD Unit
The position at FF mode.
Stop at this position.
Pinch Roller Block
Cassette
Opener
2. CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF
TAPE RUNNING MECHANISM
Tape Running Mechanism is adjusted precisely at the factory. Adjustment is not necessary as usual. When you replace the parts of the tape running mechanism because of long term usage or failure, the confirmation and adjustment are necessary.
2-1: GUIDE ROLLER
1.
Playback the VHS Alignment Tape (Monoscope of ST-N5
MODE2).
2.
Connect CH-1 of the oscilloscope to TP101 (Envelope) and CH-2 to TP3002 (SW Pulse).
3.
Trigger with SW Pulse and observe the envelope. (Refer
to Fig. 2-1-A)
4.
When observing the envelope, adjust the Taper Nut Driver slightly until the envelope will be flat.
Even if you press the Tracking Button, adjust so that flatness is not moved so much.
5.
Adjust so that the A : B ratio is better than 3 : 2 as shown in Fig. 2-1-B, even if you press the Tracking Button to move the envelope (The envelope waveform will begin to decrease when you press the Tracking Button).
6.
Adjust the PG shifter during playback.
(Refer to the ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS)
NOTE
After adjustment, confirm and adjust A/C head.
(Refer to item 2-2)
Cassette Holder Ass'y
Fig. 1-4-A
CH-1
Envelope
(TP101)
Torque Gauge/Adapter
(JG002F/JG002B)
CH-2
SW Pulse (TP3002)
CH-1
Track
CH-2
Track
Torque Gauge/Adapter
(JG002E/JG002B)
Fig. 2-1-A
Entrance Exit
S Reel
Max
A
B
Max
T Reel
Fig. 1-4-B
A : B
≥
3 : 2
Fig. 2-1-B
D2-2
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS
2-2: CONFIRMATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF AUDIO/
CONTROL HEAD
When the Tape Running Mechanism does not work well, adjust the following items.
1.
Playback the VHS Alignment Tape (Monoscope of ST-N5
MODE2).
2.
Confirm that the reflected picture of stamp mark is appeared on the tape prior to P4 Cap as shown in Fig. 2-
2-A.
a) When the reflected picture is distorted, turn the screw
1
clockwise until the distortion is disappeared.
b) When the reflected picture is not distorted, turn the screw
1
counterclockwise until little distortion is
3.
appeared, then adjust the a).
Turn the screw
2
to set the audio level to maximum.
4.
Confirm that the bottom of the Audio/ Control Head and the bottom of the tape is shown in Fig. 2-2-C.
c) When the height is not correct, turn the screw
3
to adjust the height. Then, adjust the 1~3 again.
2-3: TAPE RUNNING ADJUSTMENT
(X VALUE ADJUSTMENT)
1.
Confirm and adjust the height of the Reel Disk.
(Refer to item 1-1)
2.
Confirm and adjust the position of the Tension Post.
(Refer to item 1-2)
3.
Adjust the Guide Roller. (Refer to item 2-1)
4.
Confirm and adjust the Audio/Control Head.
(Refer to item 2-2)
5.
Connect CH-1 of the oscilloscope to TP3002 and CH-2 to
TP101.
6.
Playback the VHS Alignment Tape (Monoscope of ST-N5
MODE2).
7.
Press and hold the ATR button on the remote control
8.
more than 2 seconds to set tracking to center.
Set the X Value adjustment driver (JG153) to the
4
of
Fig. 2-2-B. Adjust X value so that the envelope waveform
output becomes maximum. Then, check if the
5
section of Fig. 2-2-B is on the center position (or rather to the cylinder side). In case of the envelope maximum at the difference position from the center, adjust the matching of picture and sound again.
Audio/Control Head
Reflected picture of
Stamp Mark
P4 Cap
Stamp Mark
3
2
Audio/Control Head
5
4
1
Fig. 2-2-A
[OK] [NG]
Fig. 2-2-B
Audio/Control Head
Tape
0.25
±
0.05mm
Fig. 2-2-C
D2-3
MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENTS
3. MECHANISM ADJUSTMENT PARTS LOCATION GUIDE
4
5
3
2
1
6
7
10 9 8
1. Tension Connect
2. Tension Arm
3. Guide Roller
4. Audio/Control Head
5. X value adjustment driver hole
6.
7.
P4 Post
T Brake Spring
8.
9.
T Reel
S Reel
10.
Adjusting section for the Tension Arm position
D2-4
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
Read and perform this adjustment when repairing the circuits or replacing electrical parts or PCB assemblies.
1. BASIC ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION
When you exchange IC and Transistor with a heat sink, apply silicon grease on the contact section of the heat sink. Before applying new silicon grease, remove all the old silicon grease. (Old grease may cause damages to the
IC and Transistor.)
1-1: PG SHIFTER
CONDITIONS
MODE-PLAYBACK
Input Signal-Alignment Tape
INSTRUCTIONS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect CH-1 on the oscilloscope to TP3002 and CH-2 to Video Out Jack.
Playback the alignment tape.
Press and hold the ATR button on the remote control more than 2 seconds to set tracking to center.
Press both CH UP button on the set and the STOP button on the set for more than 2 seconds.
CH-2
6.5H
6.5H
CH-1
Fig. 1-1-A
CH-2
CH-1
Fig. 1-1-B
D3-1
ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENTS
2. ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT PARTS LOCATION GUIDE (WIRING CONNECTION)
VCR PCB
CP102
S502
S501
CD501
AC IN
CP3001
CP8001
CP103
TP101
TP701
TP3002
TP3001
FE HEAD
AC HEAD
CP501
OS651
V651
OPERATION 2 PCB
CP681
CD681
CP651
CP601
OPERATION 1 PCB
CD501
DVD DECK
CP8101
CP2303
CP2302
CD4002
CD2001
CD2301
CD2302
DVD PCB
CP2301
D3-2
(VCR SECTION)
POWER DOES NOT TURN ON
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Does display light?
YES
NO
Is the voltage linked to L506?
YES
Check of V651 and peripheral circuit.
NO
Is the voltage at pin 30 of IC3001
0V?
YES
NO
Check of T501 and peripheral circuit.
Check IC3001.
Check of T501 and peripheral circuit.
E-1
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
THE POWER SUPPLY CUT
Inserting a cassette and push play button.
Does the power cut after 3 seconds?
NO
YES
Does the power cut after about 6 seconds?
NO
Check the POWER BLOCK.
YES
Check CAPSTAN DD UNIT and CYLINDER UNIT.
Check Q3006, Q3008 and CAPSTAN BELT.
E-2
AT PLAYBACK AND RECORDING,
CYLINDER MOTOR UNLOAD
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Is the voltage at pin 8 of
CP3001 about DC12.6V?
YES
NO
In playback, is at pin 12 of
CP3001 about DC2.6V?
YES
Check the DECK BLOCK.
NO
Check IC502.
Check IC3001.
E-3
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
AUDIO SHAKES
Is AUDIO HEAD scratched?
NO
YES
At playback, is input about
4.5Vp-p of a rectangular wave at pin 9 of IC3001?
YES
NO
NO
At playback, is pin 5 of
CP3001 3.5V?
YES
Check AUDIO BLOCK.
Change AUDIO HEAD.
Change CAPSTAN DD UNIT.
Check IC3001.
E-4
The CASSETTE TAPE
CAN NOT BE INSERTED
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Does WORM GEAR of cassette loading block move?
YES
NO
When a CASSETTE can not inserted, is pin 25 of
IC3001 5V ?
YES
NO
When a CASSETTE is inserted, is pin 8 of
CP3001 12.6V ?
NO
Check circuit of POWER BLOCK.
YES
Check WORM GEAR of cassette loading block.
Check LED of DECK,
PHOTO SENSOR.
Change
LOADING MOTOR.
E-5
WHEN INSERTING A CASSETTE,
IT EJECTS IMMEDIATELY
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Does another CASSETTE insert?
NO
YES
Does SW3001 and
REC LEVER correctly set ?
YES
After inserting
CASSETTE, is pin 35 of IC3001 0V ?
YES
Check IC3001.
NO
NO
Defective CASSETTE or cassette loading block.
Correctly SW3001 and REC LEVER set.
Check SW3001.
E-6
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
CAN NOT FF/REW
At FF/REW, does voltage at pin 98 of IC3001 change?
YES
Check DECK MECHANISM.
NO
Check of IC3001.
E-7
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
TAPE LOADING IS OK, BUT
UNLOADS IMMEDIATELY
NO
Is the voltage at pin 2 of CP3001
12V ?
YES
NO
Does CYLINDER rotate?
YES
At play, is the voltage at pin 12 of CP3001 2.6V ?
YES
NO
Is there HEAD SW
PULSE at TP3002 ?
YES
NO
Change CYLINDER unit.
NO
Is PG PULSE signal inputted to pin 104 of IC3001 ?
YES
Check POWER BLOCK.
Change IC3001.
Check Q3006 and Q3008.
E-8
AT PLAY, THE PICTURE
JITTERS VERTICAL MINUTELY
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Is FG wave of CP3001 at pin 11 5V ?
5V
YES
NO
Is pin 12 of CP3001 2.6V ?
YES
Change CYLINDER MOTOR.
NO
Change
CYLINDER MOTOR.
Change IC3001.
E-9
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
AUTO TRACKING
DOES NOT OPERATE
In auto tracking, is the voltage at pin 24 of IC3001 more than DC 0.2V?
YES
NO
Does the CTL pulse signal (more than 0.6Vp-p) appear at pin 7 of IC3001?
more than 0.6Vp-p
YES
NO
Check CONTROL HEAD.
Change IC3001.
E-10
WHEN PLAYBACK, FF OR REW
MODE IS ACTIVE, UNIT STOPS
IMMEDIATELY
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Refer to section "CAPSTAN
DD MOTOR NOT
ROTAING".
Does CAPSTAN DD
MOTOR rotate?
YES
NO
Is there REEL SENSOR
PULSE signal at pin 38 and 39 of IC3001?
YES
NO
Change IC3001.
Check Q3001 and Q3002.
E-11
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
AT PLAY, PICTURE JITTERS
HORIZONTALLY
NO
Does a noise on the picture appear?
YES
By adjusting the MANUAL
TRACKING UP/DOWN
BUTTONS, will the line disappear?
YES
NO
Is a height of GUIDE POST maximum?
YES
NO
Is PG SHIFTER adjustment 6.5H?
YES
NO
Is a wave of PB-Y unusual?
YES
Change IC101.
NO
Check P/B ENVELOPE.
The height of GUIDE POST readjust.
Adjust PG SHIFTER.
Change IC101 and peripheral circuit.
E-12
AT PLAYBACK, THE PICTUER
DOES NOT APPEAR
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Does E-E picture appear?
YES
NO
Is the voltage of IC101 at pin 23, 44, 45, 52, 68 and
77 5V?
YES
NO
Check POWER BLOCK.
Is there video signal at pin 26 of IC101?
YES
NO
Change IC101.
Is there video signal at pin 2 of IC8005?
YES
NO
Is there video signal at pin 19 of IC3001?
YES
NO
Check J8001.
Change IC8005.
Change IC3001.
E-13
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
AT PLAYBACK, THE COLER DOES
NOT APPEAR
Is there color signal in video signal at pin 26 of
IC101?
YES
NO
Is there video signal at pin
26 of IC101?
YES
Change IC101.
NO
Change X'tal.
E-14
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
PLAYBACK PICTURE IS NOISY
(EVEN AFTER CLEANING HEADS)
Is noisy a wave of video signal at pin 26 of IC101?
YES
NO
Is noisy a wave of video signal of EMITTER of Q8004?
NO
YES
Check J8001.
Check CYLINDER.
Check Q8004.
E-15
NO COLOR DURING SELF
RECORDING AND PLAYBACK
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Is there CHROMA signal at pin 30 and 32 of
IC101?
YES
NO
Is there CHROMA signal at pin 26 of IC101?
YES
Check IC8005 and circuit around of
J8001.
NO
Check TU301, IC8002, J653,
J8002 and circuit around it.
Change IC101.
E-16
AT PLAY, AUDIO DOES NOT
APPEAR
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
At E-E, does audio appear?
YES
NO
Is the voltage at pin 6 of
IC101 about 2.5V?
YES
NO
Is there audio signal at pin
10 of IC101?
YES
NO
Is there audio signal at pin
78 and 80 of IC701?
NO
Check whether there are not a damage, dirt in AUDIO HEAD.
YES
Refer to section "E-E DOES
NOT APPEAR".
Check A/C HEAD.
Check circuit around at pin
10 of IC101.
Check circuit around at pin
78 and 80 of IC701.
E-17
CAPSTAN DD MOTOR NOT
ROTATING
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
In playback, is there voltage at pin 2 of CP3001 12V?
YES
NO
In playback, is there voltage at pin 102 of IC3001 2.5V?
YES
DD MOTOR rotate now?
If not, replace it.
NO
Check POWER BLOCK.
Change IC3001.
E-18
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
THE AUDIO CAN NOT
RECORD
Is bias level at L102 OK?
NO
YES
In starting recording, is there sine wave at pin 96 of IC3001?
YES
Check disconnection and short of L102.
NO
Check IC3001.
Is there audio signal at pin 76, 78 and 80
of IC101?
YES
NO
Is there voltage of base of Q103 about 5V?
YES
NO
Is there a sine wave at pin 5 of L101?
YES
Check lead wire of A/C HEAD and CONNECTOR.
NO
Check IC701 and the circuit from TUNER or audio input jack to IC701 .
Change Q103.
Change L101.
E-19
THE CASSETTE INSERT, BUT
THE TAPE DOES NOT MOVE
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
NO
Check LOADING MOTOR and
MODE SENSOR
RELATION DEPARTMENT.
Does the mode appear at display?
YES
Does operate with
remote control?
YES
Check operation PCB.
NO
Check IC3001.
E-20
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
RECORDING MECHANISM WORKS,
BUT NO VIDEO RECORD FROM
INPUT JACK OR TUNER
Is there video signal at pin 30 and 32 of IC 101?
YES
NO
NO
Is the BASE of
Q103 5V?
YES
Is the voltage at pin 96 of IC3001 5V?
YES
NO
Check circuit of video signal from VIDEO IN or
TUNER to IC101.
Change IC3001.
Is there video signal at pin 26 of IC101?
YES
NO
Check CYLINDER UNIT and circuit around of CP101.
Change IC101.
E-21
E-E DOES NOT APPEAR
(THE PICTURE DOES NOT
APPEAR FROM TUNER)
Does normality AUDIO JACK
CONNECT?
NO
YES
Are there the voltage of +B(5V) and TU(32V) of TU301?
YES
NO
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Connection is done over again.
Check POWER BLOCK.
Check the picture.
Is there video signal at pin 17 of TU301?
YES
NO
Is there video signal at pin 26 of IC101?
YES
NO
Is there video signal at pin 19 of IC3001?
YES
NO
Check J8001.
Change TU301.
Change IC101.
Change IC3001.
E-22
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
E-E AUDIO (MONO)
DOES NOT APPEAR
Does E-E AUDIO
(STEREO) appear?
YES
NO
Is the voltage at pin 77 of IC101 5V?
YES
NO
YES
Is the voltage at pin 95 of IC3001 5V?
NO
Is there audio signal at pin 9 and 71 or pin 7 and
69 of IC701?
YES
NO
Is there audio signal at pin 6 of IC701?
YES
NO
Check circuit around of J8001.
Refer to section "E-E AUDIO
(STEREO) DOES NOT APPEAR".
Check POWER BLOCK.
Change IC3001.
Check J651 and J652 or J8002.
Change IC701.
E-23
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
E-E AUDIO (STEREO)
DOES NOT APPEAR
Is the voltage at pin 5,
15 and 32 of IC701 5V?
YES
NO
Is the voltage at pin
3 and 54 of IC701 9V?
YES
NO
Is there Audio signal at pin 9 and 71 of IC701?
YES
NO
Is there Audio signal at pin 78 and 80 of IC701.
YES
Check circuit around of J8001.
NO
Check POWER BLOCK.
Check POWER BLOCK.
Check J651, J652 and J8002.
Change IC701.
E-24
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
TUNER AUDIO (MONO)
DOES NOT APPEAR
Does E-E AUDIO
(MONO) appear?
YES
Is there signal at pin
57 of IC701?
YES
NO
NO
Is there audio signal at pin 78 and 80 of IC701?
YES
Is there audio signal a collector of Q8005 and Q8006?
YES
Check circuit around of J8001.
NO
NO
Refer to section "E-E AUDIO
(MONO) DOES NOT APPEAR".
Check circuit around of TU301 at pin 14.
Change IC701.
Check IC701.
E-25
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
TUNER AUDIO (STEREO)
DOES NOT APPEAR
Does TUNER AUDIO
(MONO) appear?
YES
NO
Does E-E AUDIO
(STEREO) appear?
YES
NO
At the time of channel change, does the display of a stereo come out to the screen?
YES
NO
Is there audio signal at pin 57 of IC701?
YES
NO
Is there audio signal at pin 78 and 80 of IC701?
YES
NO
Is there audio signal a emitter of
Q8005 and Q8006.
YES
Check circuit around of J8001.
NO
Refer to section "TUNER AUDIO
(MONO) DOES NOT APPEAR".
Refer to section "E-E AUDIO
(STEREO) DOES NOT APPEAR".
Change IC701.
Check circuit around of TU301 at pin 14.
Change IC701.
Check IC701.
E-26
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
PB AUDIO (Hi-Fi)
DOES NOT APPEAR
Does E-E AUDIO
(STEREO) appear?
YES
NO
Does NORMAL PB
AUDIO appear?
YES
NO
Is there audio signal at pin 24 and 27 of IC701?
YES
NO
Is there audio signal at pin 78 and 80 of IC701?
YES
NO
Check circuit around of J8001.
Refer to section "E-E AUDIO
(STEREO) DOES NOT APPEAR".
Refer to section "AT PLAY,
AUDIO DOES NOT APPEAR".
Check circuit of HEAD AMP and CYLINDER UNIT.
Change IC701.
E-27
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Hi-Fi AUDIO
CAN NOT RECORD
Does E-E AUDIO appear?
YES
NO
AT state of video recording, is there audio signal at
pin 7, 9, 69 and 71 of IC701?
YES
NO
Is there audio signal at pin 78 and 80 of
IC701?
YES
NO
At recording and play, is there signal at pin 7, 8 and 9 of CP101?
YES
Check IC701.
NO
Refer to section "E-E AUDIO
(MONO) DOES NOT APPEAR".
Check circuit around of J651,
J652, J8002 and TU301.
Change IC701.
Check CYLINDER UNIT.
E-28
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
(DVD SECTION)
DECK DOES NOT ACCEPT
OPEN/CLOSE
Is the voltage at pin 3 and
14 of IC2301 about DC9V ?
NO
YES
Is the lose connection at CD2301 and CD2302 to DECK ?
NO
Check loader block.
YES
Check P.CON 9V line of
POWER BLOCK.
Check CD2301 and CD2302 connection to DECK.
E-29
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
NO PLAYBACK PICTURE
OF AV JACK
Is there a voltage
(beam current) at
JG017 and JG018?
NO
YES
Is there a signal at pin
160, 162, 165 and 167 of IC4001?
NO
YES
Is there video signal at pin 150 of IC4001?
NO
YES
Change IC4001.
Check loader block.
Check CP2301 and peripheral circuit.
Check IC8003 and peripheral circuit.
E-30
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
NO PLAYBACK PICTURE OF
S-VIDEO JACK
Is there Y signal at pin 151 of IC4001 ?
NO
YES
Is there VIDEO signal at pin 153 of IC4001 ?
NO
YES
Change IC4001.
Check J8008 and peripheral circuit.
REFER TO "NO PLAYBACK
PICTURE OF AV JACK ".
E-31
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
NO COLOR PLAYBACK PICTURE
OF S-VIDEO JACK
Is there C signal at pin 153 of IC4001 ?
NO
YES
Is there Y signal at pin 151 of IC4001?
YES
NO
YES
Is there VIDEO signal at pin 153 of IC4001?
NO
Is the voltage at pin 25,
64, 93,131 and 182 of
IC4001 about 1.8V?
NO
YES
Change IC4001.
Check J8008 and peripheral circuit.
REFER TO "NO PLAYBACK
PICTURE OF S-VIDEO JACK".
REFER TO "NO PLAYBACK
PICTURE OF AV JACK" .
Check P.CON+3.3V line on
POWER BLOCK.
E-32
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
NO AUDIO ON PLAYBACK
Is there AUDIO signal at pin 7 and 8 of IC8102 ?
NO
Change IC4001.
YES
Check IC8102 and peripheral circuit.
E-33
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW
204
204
204
201
201
205
208
104
208
104
105
PCB130
(DVD PCB ASS'Y)
204
207
205
111
106
202
110
202
207
130
119
109
117
103
102
110
206
209
129
PCB270
(OPERATION 1 PCB ASS'Y)
208
202
115
208
202
101A
101L
101E
101D
101I
101K
101N
101F
101G
101J
101H
211
101C
107
107
101M
101B
101E
101L
101
202
208
118
PCB010
(VCR PCB ASS'Y)
J1-1
PCB280
(OPERATION 2 PCB ASS'Y)
210
210
203
203
114
116
204
123
MECHANICAL EXPLODED VIEW
(PACKING DIAGRAM)
122
125
120, 126, 127, 128
CD6002, CD6003,
TM601
121
122
131
108
124
J1-2
CHASSIS EXPLODED VIEW (TOP VIEW)
505
503
CD1501
300
M2003
319
503
UN4001
341
331
334
314
323
508
333
501
H5002
315
336
324
335
342
503
504
H5001
306
322
508
312
305
AA
AA
332
317
301
AA
313
AA
AA
AA
AA
CD1502
AA
CLASS
GREASE
AA
M101
304
325
309
AA
AA
307
AA
AA
506
345
302
316
507
AA
318
MARK
AA
321
AA
510
AA
AA
NOTE:
Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section.
Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.
J2-1
CHASSIS EXPLODED VIEW (BOTTOM VIEW)
308
509
344
327
343
328
326
AA
M2001
501
320
303
338
502
AA
337
AA
CD1501
502
AA
CD1502
AA
340
502
AA
AA
AA
329
311
AA
339
AA
310
AA
AA
300
AA
AA
505
330
CLASS
GREASE
MARK
AA
NOTE:
Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section.
Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.
J2-2
600
DVD DECK EXPLODED VIEW
610
608
AA
704
611
612
Cannot supply separately.
If the repair is needed, replace the
LOADER SUB ASS'Y.
614
AA
AA
AA
AA
AA
613
616
AA
AA
AA
609
M2603
602
AA
607
615
AA
SW1
SW2
PCB640
(SW PCB ASS'Y)
CD2301
705
701
CD2001
605
PCB610
(LOADING MOTOR PCB ASS'Y)
CD2302
702
604
703
606
603
M2602
Do not replace the parts. Because, minute adjustments are needed if this condition is disassembled further more.
If the repair is needed, replace the
DVD MECHA ASS'Y.
601
605
CLASS
GREASE
MARK
AA
NOTE:
Applying positions AA for the grease are displayed for this section.
Check if the correct grease is applied for each position.
J3-1
MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
207
208
209
201
202
203
204
205
206
210
211
Location No. TSB P/N
101
101A
101B
101C
101D
101E
101F
101G
101H
101I
101J
101K
101L
101M
101N
AE007213
AE007431
AE006720
AE006721
AE007195
AE001167
AE001847
AE006722
AE006723
AE007196
AE001324
AE001848
AE004701
AE007197
AE007198
AE006652
AE006653
AE003509
AE006725
AE006726
AE001852
AE005535
AE004703
BZ710498
AE006728
BZ710331
AE000011
AE007199
AE005122
79091466
BZ710659
AE006732
BZ710466
AE004985
AD301577
AE006733
AE006734
AE007217
AE007432
AE000060
AE007433
AE007434
AE007201
AE006673
AE007202
AE003526
AE004724
AE005537
AE003524
AE005541
AE003530
AE005539
AE005540
AE006822
701WPA1363
701WPA1364
753WUA0065
702WSA0241
761WPA0382
8965TS1010
795WCA0674
761WPA0321
85OP700038
752WUA0010
753WUAA006
7230007398
7230007952
726000A073
761WPA0261
752WSA0290
761WSA0234
752WSA0230
J2C53429A
791WHA0100
792WHA0603
792WHA0601
793WCD1640
A2F402H975
JB5UD300
J2F40201A
J2F40210A
761WPA0406
8109130B7U
810923053U
810923080U
8109K3060U
8154D3033U
8109I30A0U
810F13080U
811022680U
810713040U
810722660U
8110E2680U
Reference No.
7A7010115A
701WPJD096
711WPD0678
712WPJ0904
712WPJ0926
7230007689
7235490018
736WPB0005
736WPB0006
736WPB0016
742WKA0001
743WKA0042
800WFAA015
736WPB0014
736WPB0017
FRONT CABI ASS'Y
CABINET,FRONT
PLATE,DISPLAY
FLAP,DVD
FLAP,VCR
SHEET,LED
BADGE,BRAND
BUTTON,FRAME-VCR
BUTTON,FRAME-DVD
BUTTON,POWER
SPRING,DVD-FLAP
SPRING,FLAP
CUSHION,LEG
BUTTON,OPEN
BUTTON,EJECT
Description
HOLDER,DECK
HOLDER,DECK
SPRING,EARTH
CABINET,TOP
PAD,FLAT
SHIELD,JACK
SPRING,EARTH HEAD AMP
SHEET,JACK
SHEET,CAUTION
SHIELD,COMPO
ANGLE,FRONT
SHIELD,CASE HEAD AMP
PACKAGE,BACK
PACKAGE,FRONT
INSTRUCTION BOOK KIT
10x10x25
COVER,PCB
SCREW,TAP TITE(B) R PAN
SCREW,TAP TITE(B) R BIND
SCREW,TAP TITE(B) BIND
3x27
3x5.3
3x8
SCREW,TAP TITE(B) BIND(3D) 3x6
SCREW,TAP TITE(B) WH8 3x33R
SCREW,TAP TITE(B) WH7 3x10
SEMS(F)
SCREW,TAP TITE(P) BIND
SCREW,TAP TITE(S) PAN
3x8
2.6x8
3x4
SCREW,TAP TITE(S) BIND
SCREW,TAP TITE(P) WH10
2.6x6
M2.6x8
K1-1
CHASSIS REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No. TSB P/N
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
AE006739
AE005514
AE006679
BZ710193
BZ710515
BZ710094
BZ710112
AE006676
BZ710517
AE005920
AE005836
AE005837
BZ710521
AE005838
AE005839
BZ710524
AE006677
BZ710552
BZ710106
AE006678
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
AE005845
AE005846
AE005847
AE005848
AE005849
AE005850
AE005851
BZ710056
BZ710054
AE005540
CD1501
CD1502
H5001
H5002
!
M101
M2001
!
!
BZ614292
BZ614339
AE004714
AD301676
AE005552
AE005853
M2003 AE006792
UN4001 AE006680
AE007221
AE005842
BZ710531
BZ710532
BZ710533
BZ710534
BZ710535
BZ710536
BZ710537
BZ710538
BZ710092
BZ710093
BZ710366
BZ710762
BZ710540
BZ710541
BZ710763
BZ710543
BZ710544
AE005843
BZ710546
BZ710110
BZ710547
BZ710548
BZ710549
AE005844
85OP400554
85OA900233
85OP000496
85OP200316
85OP200317
85OP200308
85OP200311
85OP200312
85OP200313
85OP300194
85OP400490
85OP400492
85OP400520
85OP400542
85OP400533
85OP600573
85OP600584
85OP600577
85OP600578
85OP600585
A2F401H420K
85OA400245
85OP900759
85OP200290
85OP600581
85OP500083
85OP800324
85OA000529
85OA200089
85OA200092
85OA300068
85OA300070
85OA400223
85OA400249
85OA400248
85OA400231
85OA900236
85OP900745
85OP700035
85OP900756
Reference No.
Description
A2F401H420K DECK ASSY
PINCH ROLLER BLOCK VA2
LEVER,FLAP(S)
BELT,CAPSTAN (S)
WORM
BASE,AC HEAD
SPRING,AC HEAD
MAIN CHASSIS ASS'Y(S)
CLUTCH ASS'Y
ARM IDLER ASS'Y
LOADING ARM S UNIT
LOADING ARM T UNIT
INCLINED BASE T UINT 3S
P5 ARM ASS'Y 2
TENSION ARM ASS'Y 2
INCLINED BASE S UNIT
CASS HOLDER ASS'Y(S)
CASS,OPENER
REFLECTOR,LED
BRACKET,TOP(S)
HOLDER,CAPSTAN
LINK UNIT
POST,CASS GUIDE
REEL,S (S)
REEL,T (S)
GEAR,IDLER
GEAR,CLUTCH
GEAR,COUPLING
LEVER,CLUTCH
GEAR,MAIN LOADING
LEVER,TENSION
HOLDER,TENSION
CAP.P4
BAND,TENSION
CONNECT,TENSION
ARM,BRAKE T
BAND,BRAKE T
CAM,PINCH ROLLER
CAM,MAIN
ROD,MAIN
85OP600582
85OP800322
85OP800360
85OP800355
85OP800356
85OP900754
GEAR,JOINT
SPRING,TENSION
SPRING,BRAKE T
SPRING,COUPLING
SPRING,RING
LEVER,LINK
810722680U
83ETW3000U
810722640U
810212060U
810912660U
810A13040U
810A12650U
82Q264713N
82P184505N
810722660U
SCREW,TAP TITE(S) BIND
E-RING
SCREW,TAP TITE(S) BIND
SCREW,PAN
SCREW,TAP TITE(B) PAN
M2.6x8
3.0
M2.6x4
M2x6
M2.6x6
SCREW/WASHER(A)
SCREW/WASHER(A)
POLYSLIDER WASHER
M3x4
M2.6x5
2.6x4.7xT0.13
POLYSLIDER WASHER(CUT) 1.8x4.5xT0.5
SCREW,TAP TITE(S) BIND 2.6x6
122H071704
122Y021902
1523Q91004
1543Q02014
1596S98002
1510S98044
1589S11025
A2F401H500
CORD JUMPER
CORD JUMPER
HEAD,AUDIO CONTROL
HEAD (FULL ERASE)
MOTOR,LOADING
CAPSTAN DD UNIT
MICRO MOTOR
CYLINDER UNIT ASS'Y
2H071704
2Y021902
VTR-1X2RPE22-772
VTR-1X2ERS11-154
MDB2B66B
F2QVB73B
I20AL34K
A2F401H500
K2-1
DVD DECK REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Location No. TSB P/N
!
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
AE006521
AE005003
AE003550
AE003551
AE005414
AE003538
AE003539
AE006115
AE003541
AE003542
AE003549
AE003544
AE003545
AE003546
AE003547
AE003548
BZ710149
701
702
703
704
705
AE003530
AE003554
AE003555
AE003556
AE003557
CD2001 AD301855
CD2301 AE003558
CD2302 AE003559
!
!
M2602
M2603
AE005930
AE005931
PCB610 AE005932
PCB640 AE006740
SW1 AE003564
SW2 AE003565
A2F401H650
92P100109A
92P100094A
92P100088A
92P100108A
92P200013A
92P200014A
92SBB0029A
92P100095A
92P100097A
92P100096A
92P200012A
92P000014A
92P100093A
92P100091A
92P100092A
800WFAA008
Reference No.
DVD MECHA ASS'Y
HOLDER,TRAVERSE
CLAMPER
GEAR,MOTOR
GEAR,MIDDLE
INSULATOR(F)
INSULATOR(R)
LOADER SUB ASS'Y
GEAR,PULLEY
PULLEY,MOTOR
GEAR,MAIN
BELT,LOADING
PLATE,CLAMPER
RACK,LOADING
FRAME,MAIN
TRAY
CUSHION C
Description
A2F401H650
811022680U
814011723U
816112080U
814011730U
811022080U
SCREW,TAP TITE(P) BIND 2.6x8
SEMS.TAP TITE(P) PAN W10 2x8
SCREW,TAP TITE(P) BIND 2x8
122H0O1901
122H062102
122H052601
1515S98003
1596S18003
A5R801V610
A2F401H640
0515S32002
0500101037
CORD JUMPER
CORD JUMPER
CORD JUMPER
FEED MOTOR
MOTOR,LOADING
PCB ASS'Y
PCB ASS'Y
SWITCH
PUSH SWITCH
2H0O1901
2H062102
2H052601
BCZ3B03B
BCZ3B52B
DED003A
DED012B
SSS-13-2
ESE22MH24
K3-1
Location No.
TSB P/N
R302
R304
R305
R306
! R501
! R502
! R503
! R504
R505
R506
R507
R508
R509
R131
R132
R133
R136
R137
R138
R139
R140
R141
R142
R144
R301
R112
R113
R114
R115
R116
R117
R119
R122
R123
R124
R126
R127
R129
R101
R102
R103
R105
R106
R107
R108
R109
R110
R111
R523
R524
R527
R529
R530
R531
R532
R533
R534
R536
R547
R511
! R512
R513
R514
R515
! R516
! R517
R518
R519
R520
R521
R522
AE000849
AE001893
AE001805
AE001891
AE001007
AE001891
AE001788
BZ210126
AE001781
AE002154
BZ210125
AE002150
AE001783
AE001783
BZ210119
79091142
BZ210219
BZ210039
BZ210206
AE000145
AE002237
AE001774
AE001784
AD301203
AD301203
AE002152
AE001784
AE001784
BZ210119
AE002533
AE001895
AE001891
BZ210119
AE001805
AE001805
AE001282
AE001890
AE000851
AE002154
AE002145
AE001801
AE002147
AE001785
BZ210126
AE001806
AE002147
AE001802
AE002147
AE001299
AE001779
AE000934
AE000350
AE001792
AE005735
BZ210180
79091139
AE001783
AE001795
AE002151
AE001795
AE001801
AD301203
BZ210135
AE002237
AE002236
AE001784
AE001784
BZ210135
AE002234
AE001799
AE001785
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Reference No.
RC
RESISTORS
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
R,METAL OXIDE
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
R,METAL OXIDE
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
R,FUSE
RC
RC
RC
R803R9152J
R803R9332J
R803R9822J
R803R9223J
R002T4123J
R803R9223J
R803R9123J
R002T4222J
R803R9101J
R803R9821J
R002T4224J
R803R9333J
R803R9102J
R803R9102J
R002T4102J
R803R9220J
R0G3K2335K
R3X181010J
R002T2155J
R002T2561J
R002T4684J
R002T2105J
R803R9103J
R002T4101J
R002T4101J
R803R9561J
R803R9103J
R803R9103J
R002T4102J
R803R9681J
R803R9392J
R803R9223J
R002T4102J
R803R9822J
R803R9822J
R803R9334J
R803R9221J
R803R9203J
R803R9821J
R803R9153J
R803R9682J
R803R9182J
R803R9104J
R002T4222J
R803R9823J
R803R9182J
R803R9684J
R803R9182J
R803R9564J
R3X181683J
R002T2391J
R002T2221J
R803R9273J
R63881R22J
R002T2102J
R803R9151J
R803R9102J
R803R9332F
R803R9391J
R803R9332F
R803R9682J
R002T4101J
R002T4221J
R002T4684J
R002T4474J
R803R9103J
R803R9103J
R002T4221J
R002T2103J
R803R9562J
R803R9104J
Description
1.5K OHM 1/16W
3.3K OHM 1/16W
8.2K OHM 1/16W
22K OHM 1/16W
12K OHM 1/4W
22K OHM 1/16W
12K OHM 1/16W
2.2K OHM 1/4W
100 OHM 1/16W
820 OHM 1/16W
220K OHM 1/4W
33K OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/4W
22 OHM 1/16W
3.3M OHM 1/2W
1 OHM 1W
1.5M OHM 1/2W
560 OHM 1/2W
680K OHM 1/4W
1M OHM 1/2W
10K OHM 1/16W
100 OHM 1/4W
100 OHM 1/4W
560 OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/4W
680 OHM 1/16W
3.9K OHM 1/16W
22K OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/4W
8.2K OHM 1/16W
8.2K OHM 1/16W
330K OHM 1/16W
220 OHM 1/16W
20K OHM 1/16W
820 OHM 1/16W
15K OHM 1/16W
6.8K OHM 1/16W
1.8K OHM 1/16W
100K OHM 1/16W
2.2K OHM 1/4W
82K OHM 1/16W
1.8K OHM 1/16W
680K OHM 1/16W
1.8K OHM 1/16W
560K OHM 1/16W
68K OHM 1W
390 OHM 1/2W
220 OHM 1/2W
27K OHM 1/16W
0.22 OHM 1W
1K OHM 1/2W
150 OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
3.3K OHM 1/16W
390 OHM 1/16W
3.3K OHM 1/16W
6.8K OHM 1/16W
100 OHM 1/4W
220 OHM 1/4W
680K OHM 1/4W
470K OHM 1/4W
10K OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
220 OHM 1/4W
10K OHM 1/2W
5.6K OHM 1/16W
100K OHM 1/16W
K4-1
Location No.
TSB P/N
R702
R703
R704
R706
R707
R708
R710
R711
R712
R713
R714
R715
R716
R674
R675
R676
R683
R685
R686
R687
R689
R690
R691
R692
R701
R661
R662
R663
R664
R665
R666
R667
R668
R669
R670
R671
R672
R673
R549
R552
R553
R554
R602
R603
R604
R606
R607
R651
R717
R718
R719
R720
R721
R722
R723
R724
R725
R726
R727
R728
R729
R731
R2301
R2302
R2303
R2304
R2305
R2306
R2307
R2308
R2309
AE003232
AE002154
AE001803
AE005090
AE001776
BZ210162
BZ210162
BZ210060
BZ210202
BZ210125
AD301301
AD302345
BZ210118
AE001007
BZ210119
BZ210118
AE002147
AE001892
AE004696
AE001799
BZ210118
AE000849
AE001799
AE001799
AE001892
BZ210164
AE001781
BZ210118
BZ210182
BZ210060
AE001778
BZ210162
AE001555
BZ210135
AD301203
AE002154
AE003232
AE003232
AE002154
AE003232
AE003232
AE003232
AE003232
AE002154
AE003232
AE002154
AE003232
AE003232
AE001892
AD301430
BZ210118
AE001799
AE000849
AE002147
AE001007
BZ210119
79091400
AE001790
AE001796
AD301203
AD301203
AE001783
AE001783
AE005767
AE001793
AE001793
AE001792
AE005768
AE005031
AE001784
AE005767
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Reference No.
RC
RESISTORS
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
R803R9181J
R803R9821J
R803R9750J
R803R9221F
R002T4133J
R002T4682J
R002T4682J
R002T4332J
R002T4333J
R002T4224J
R002T4152J
R803R9472J
R002T4473J
R002T4123J
R002T4102J
R002T4473J
R803R9182J
R803R9331J
R002T4394J
R803R9562J
R002T4473J
R803R9152J
R803R9562J
R803R9562J
R803R9331J
R002T4104J
R803R9101J
R002T4473J
R002T4103J
R002T4332J
R002T4622J
R002T4682J
R002T4563J
R002T4221J
R002T4101J
R803R9821J
R803R9181J
R803R9181J
R803R9821J
R803R9181J
R803R9181J
R803R9181J
R803R9181J
R803R9821J
R803R9181J
R803R9821J
R803R9181J
R803R9181J
R803R9331J
R002T4225J
R002T4473J
R803R9562J
R803R9152J
R803R9182J
R002T4123J
R002T4102J
R803R9393J
R803R9222J
R803R9471J
R002T4101J
R002T4101J
R803R9102J
R803R9102J
R803R9101F
R803R92R2J
R803R92R2J
R803R9273J
R803R96R8J
R803R9753J
R803R9103J
R803R9101F
Description
180 OHM 1/16W
820 OHM 1/16W
75 OHM 1/16W
220 OHM 1/16W
13K OHM 1/4W
6.8K OHM 1/4W
6.8K OHM 1/4W
3.3K OHM 1/4W
33K OHM 1/4W
220K OHM 1/4W
1.5K OHM 1/4W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
47K OHM 1/4W
12K OHM 1/4W
1K OHM 1/4W
47K OHM 1/4W
1.8K OHM 1/16W
330 OHM 1/16W
390K OHM 1/4W
5.6K OHM 1/16W
47K OHM 1/4W
1.5K OHM 1/16W
5.6K OHM 1/16W
5.6K OHM 1/16W
330 OHM 1/16W
100K OHM 1/4W
100 OHM 1/16W
47K OHM 1/4W
10K OHM 1/4W
3.3K OHM 1/4W
6.2K OHM 1/4W
6.8K OHM 1/4W
56K OHM 1/4W
220 OHM 1/4W
100 OHM 1/4W
820 OHM 1/16W
180 OHM 1/16W
180 OHM 1/16W
820 OHM 1/16W
180 OHM 1/16W
180 OHM 1/16W
180 OHM 1/16W
180 OHM 1/16W
820 OHM 1/16W
180 OHM 1/16W
820 OHM 1/16W
180 OHM 1/16W
180 OHM 1/16W
330 OHM 1/16W
2.2M OHM 1/4W
47K OHM 1/4W
5.6K OHM 1/16W
1.5K OHM 1/16W
1.8K OHM 1/16W
12K OHM 1/4W
1K OHM 1/4W
39K OHM 1/16W
2.2K OHM 1/16W
470 OHM 1/16W
100 OHM 1/4W
100 OHM 1/4W
1K OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
100 OHM 1/16W
2.2 OHM 1/16W
2.2 OHM 1/16W
27K OHM 1/16W
6.8 OHM 1/16W
75K OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
100 OHM 1/16W
K4-2
Location No.
TSB P/N
R2360
R2361
R2362
R3001
R3002
R3003
R3004
R3006
R3007
R3008
R3009
R3010
R3011
R2347
R2348
R2349
R2350
R2351
R2352
R2353
R2355
R2356
R2357
R2358
R2359
R2318
R2319
R2321
R2323
R2324
R2325
R2326
R2327
R2328
R2329
R2330
R2332
R2333
R2334
R2335
R2336
R2337
R2338
R2339
R2340
R2341
R2342
R2346
R3012
R3014
R3015
R3016
R3017
R3019
R3020
R3021
R3022
R3025
R3026
R3027
R3028
R3030
R3031
R3032
R3033
R3034
R3035
R3036
R3037
R3038
R3043
AE001893
AE001893
AE001781
AD302345
AD302345
AE001781
AE001781
AE001783
AE004251
AE001783
AE001889
AE004251
AE001794
AE001790
AE001893
AE001799
AE001775
AE001893
AE001282
AE001797
AE001801
AE001783
AE001790
AE001784
BZ210118
AE005768
AE001898
AE001784
AE004247
AE001783
AE001801
AE001799
AD302345
AD302345
AE004247
AE001783
AE001890
AE001890
AE001784
AE001893
AE002151
AE001784
AE001788
AE001787
AE005768
AE005768
AD302345
AE001893
AE001555
AE001898
BZ210118
AE000356
AE002152
BZ210118
AE002152
AE001783
AE002146
AE001796
AE002149
AE002145
BZ210118
AE001799
AE001887
AE001784
AE001784
AE001887
AE001784
AE001784
AE001797
AD302345
AE001896
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Reference No.
RC
RESISTORS
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
R803R9332J
R803R9332J
R803R9101J
R803R9472J
R803R9472J
R803R9101J
R803R9101J
R803R9102J
R803R9820J
R803R9102J
R803R9121J
R803R9820J
R803R9330J
R803R9222J
R803R9332J
R803R9562J
R002T4121J
R803R9332J
R803R9334J
R803R9473J
R803R9682J
R803R9102J
R803R9222J
R803R9103J
R002T4473J
R803R96R8J
R803R9563J
R803R9103J
R803R91R2J
R803R9102J
R803R9682J
R803R9562J
R803R9472J
R803R9472J
R803R91R2J
R803R9102J
R803R9221J
R803R9221J
R803R9103J
R803R9332J
R803R9391J
R803R9103J
R803R9123J
R803R9122J
R803R96R8J
R803R96R8J
R803R9472J
R803R9332J
R002T4563J
R803R9563J
R002T4473J
R002T4271J
R803R9561J
R002T4473J
R803R9561J
R803R9102J
R803R9154J
R803R9471J
R803R9274J
R803R9153J
R002T4473J
R803R9562J
R803R9105J
R803R9103J
R803R9103J
R803R9105J
R803R9103J
R803R9103J
R803R9473J
R803R9472J
R803R9474J
Description
3.3K OHM 1/16W
3.3K OHM 1/16W
100 OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
100 OHM 1/16W
100 OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
82 OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
120 OHM 1/16W
82 OHM 1/16W
33 OHM 1/16W
2.2K OHM 1/16W
3.3K OHM 1/16W
5.6K OHM 1/16W
120 OHM 1/4W
3.3K OHM 1/16W
330K OHM 1/16W
47K OHM 1/16W
6.8K OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
2.2K OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
47K OHM 1/4W
6.8 OHM 1/16W
56K OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
1.2 OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
6.8K OHM 1/16W
5.6K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
1.2 OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
220 OHM 1/16W
220 OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
3.3K OHM 1/16W
390 OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
12K OHM 1/16W
1.2K OHM 1/16W
6.8 OHM 1/16W
6.8 OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
3.3K OHM 1/16W
56K OHM 1/4W
56K OHM 1/16W
47K OHM 1/4W
270 OHM 1/4W
560 OHM 1/16W
47K OHM 1/4W
560 OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
150K OHM 1/16W
470 OHM 1/16W
270K OHM 1/16W
15K OHM 1/16W
47K OHM 1/4W
5.6K OHM 1/16W
1M OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
1M OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
47K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
470K OHM 1/16W
K4-3
Location No.
TSB P/N
R4031
R4035
R4036
R4037
R4038
R4039
R4040
R4041
R4042
R4043
R4044
R4045
R4048
R4012
R4014
R4016
R4019
R4020
R4021
R4022
R4023
R4024
R4025
R4026
R4027
R3044
R3045
R3046
R3047
R3049
R3050
R3051
R3053
R3055
R3056
R3057
R3062
R3063
R3083
R3087
R4001
R4002
R4003
R4004
R4005
R4008
R4009
R4010
R4049
R4050
R4051
R4052
R4053
R4054
R4057
R4058
R4059
R4060
R4061
R4062
R4063
R4064
R4070
R4071
R4072
R4073
R4076
R4077
R4078
R4080
R4081
AE001887
AD302345
AE001781
AE001794
AE001794
AE001794
AE000845
AD302345
AD302345
AE001890
AE001890
AE001890
AD302345
AD302345
AD302345
AD302345
AD302345
AD302345
AD302345
AD302345
AE001781
AE000845
AD302345
AE002152
AE001797
AE001893
AE001893
AE001784
AE001784
AE001797
AD301203
AE002148
AE001896
AE001891
AE001783
AE001891
AE001783
AE001783
AE002150
AE002150
AE001894
AE001899
AE001899
AE001899
AE001899
AE001781
AE006714
AE001790
AD302345
AD302345
AD302345
AD302345
AE001783
AE001783
AE001797
AE001890
AE001781
AE001888
AE001888
79091400
AE002145
AE001781
AE001797
79091139
AE001794
AE001794
AE001794
AD302345
AD302345
AE002876
AE006622
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Reference No.
RC
RESISTORS
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
R803R9105J
R803R9472J
R803R9101J
R803R9330J
R803R9330J
R803R9330J
R803R9103F
R803R9472J
R803R9472J
R803R9221J
R803R9221J
R803R9221J
R803R9472J
R803R9472J
R803R9472J
R803R9472J
R803R9472J
R803R9472J
R803R9472J
R803R9472J
R803R9101J
R803R9103F
R803R9472J
R803R9561J
R803R9473J
R803R9332J
R803R9332J
R803R9103J
R803R9103J
R803R9473J
R002T4101J
R803R9183J
R803R9474J
R803R9223J
R803R9102J
R803R9223J
R803R9102J
R803R9102J
R803R9333J
R803R9333J
R803R9391F
R803R9750F
R803R9750F
R803R9750F
R803R9750F
R803R9101J
R803R9331F
R803R9222J
R803R9472J
R803R9472J
R803R9472J
R803R9472J
R803R9102J
R803R9102J
R803R9473J
R803R9221J
R803R9101J
R803R9113J
R803R9113J
R803R9393J
R803R9153J
R803R9101J
R803R9473J
R803R9151J
R803R9330J
R803R9330J
R803R9330J
R803R9472J
R803R9472J
R803R9472F
R803R9392F
Description
1M OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
100 OHM 1/16W
33 OHM 1/16W
33 OHM 1/16W
33 OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
220 OHM 1/16W
220 OHM 1/16W
220 OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
100 OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
560 OHM 1/16W
47K OHM 1/16W
3.3K OHM 1/16W
3.3K OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
47K OHM 1/16W
100 OHM 1/4W
18K OHM 1/16W
470K OHM 1/16W
22K OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
22K OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
33K OHM 1/16W
33K OHM 1/16W
390 OHM 1/16W
75 OHM 1/16W
75 OHM 1/16W
75 OHM 1/16W
75 OHM 1/16W
100 OHM 1/16W
330 OHM 1/16W
2.2K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
47K OHM 1/16W
220 OHM 1/16W
100 OHM 1/16W
11K OHM 1/16W
11K OHM 1/16W
39K OHM 1/16W
15K OHM 1/16W
100 OHM 1/16W
47K OHM 1/16W
150 OHM 1/16W
33 OHM 1/16W
33 OHM 1/16W
33 OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
3.9K OHM 1/16W
K4-4
C101
C102
C104
C105
C106
C107
C108
C109
C110
C112
C114
Location No.
TSB P/N
R8039
R8040
R8041
R8042
R8044
R8045
R8046
R8047
R8048
R8049
R8050
R8051
R8052
R8027
R8028
R8029
R8030
R8031
R8032
R8033
R8034
R8035
R8036
R8037
R8038
R8001
R8002
R8003
R8004
R8005
R8006
R8007
R8008
R8009
R8010
R8011
R8012
R8013
R8014
R8015
R8016
R8017
R8021
R8022
R8023
R8024
R8025
R8026
R8053
R8054
R8055
R8056
R8057
R8059
R8101
R8112
R8113
R8116
R8121
AD302345
AE000353
AE000353
AE001796
AE001796
79091139
AE007385
AE000849
AE001784
BZ210107
AE001803
AE001788
AE001788
AE001803
AE001784
AE001784
AE000358
AE001785
AE001785
AE003984
AE001784
AE001784
AE001784
AE001797
AE001784
AE001803
AE001893
AE000849
BZ210202
AE001890
AE001800
AE001785
AE001796
AE000353
AE001800
AD301203
AE001796
AE001784
AE001781
AE001781
AE001790
AE001790
AE001783
AE001783
AE001893
AD302345
AE001783
AE001896
AE000487
AE001790
AE000849
79091139
AE001797
BZ210122
AE001783
AE001796
AE001796
AE002152
AE002152
AE004695
AE001544
AE001768
BZ110263
AE001726
AE002126
AE001726
AE002124
BZ210177
AE001768
AE002124
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Reference No.
P232W1333J
E50HU3100M
E50HU0221M
E50HU2220M
CS0PB0414K
CS0PB04E4K
CS0PB0414K
CS0PB0315K
E02LU2470M
E50HU0221M
CS0PB0315K
RC
RESISTORS
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
RC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CE
CC
RC
RC
CAPACITORS
CMP
CE
CE
R803R9472J
R002T2471J
R002T2471J
R803R9471J
R803R9471J
R803R9151J
R00202471J
R803R9152J
R803R9103J
R002T4750J
R803R9750J
R803R9123J
R803R9123J
R803R9750J
R803R9103J
R803R9103J
R002T4471J
R803R9104J
R803R9104J
R002T4330J
R803R9103J
R803R9103J
R803R9103J
R803R9473J
R803R9103J
R803R9750J
R803R9332J
R803R9152J
R002T4333J
R803R9221J
R803R9680J
R803R9104J
R803R9471J
R002T2471J
R803R9680J
R002T4101J
R803R9471J
R803R9103J
R803R9101J
R803R9101J
R803R9222J
R803R9222J
R803R9102J
R803R9102J
R803R9332J
R803R9472J
R803R9102J
R803R9474J
R002T4560J
R803R9222J
R803R9152J
R803R9151J
R803R9473J
R002T4472J
R803R9102J
R803R9471J
R803R9471J
R803R9561J
R803R9561J
Description
4.7K OHM 1/16W
470 OHM 1/2W
470 OHM 1/2W
470 OHM 1/16W
470 OHM 1/16W
150 OHM 1/16W
470 OHM 1/2W
1.5K OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
75 OHM 1/4W
75 OHM 1/16W
12K OHM 1/16W
12K OHM 1/16W
75 OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
470 OHM 1/4W
100K OHM 1/16W
100K OHM 1/16W
33 OHM 1/4W
10K OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
47K OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
75 OHM 1/16W
3.3K OHM 1/16W
1.5K OHM 1/16W
33K OHM 1/4W
220 OHM 1/16W
68 OHM 1/16W
100K OHM 1/16W
470 OHM 1/16W
470 OHM 1/2W
68 OHM 1/16W
100 OHM 1/4W
470 OHM 1/16W
10K OHM 1/16W
100 OHM 1/16W
100 OHM 1/16W
2.2K OHM 1/16W
2.2K OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
3.3K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/16W
1K OHM 1/16W
470K OHM 1/16W
56 OHM 1/4W
2.2K OHM 1/16W
1.5K OHM 1/16W
150 OHM 1/16W
47K OHM 1/16W
4.7K OHM 1/4W
1K OHM 1/16W
470 OHM 1/16W
470 OHM 1/16W
560 OHM 1/16W
560 OHM 1/16W
0.033 UF 100V MMTS
10 UF 25 V
220 UF 6.3V
22 UF 16 V
0.01 UF 50V B
0.015 UF 50V B
0.01 UF 50V B
0.1 UF 25V B
47 UF 16V
220 UF 6.3V
0.1 UF 25V B
K4-5
Location No.
TSB P/N
C156
C158
C160
C161
C162
C163
C165
C166
C169
C174
C302
C303
C307
C140
C141
C142
C143
C144
C145
C146
C147
C148
C151
C152
C154
C125
C126
C127
C129
C131
C132
C133
C134
C135
C136
C137
C138
C139
C115
C116
C117
C118
C119
C120
C121
C122
C123
C124
C509
C510
! C511
C512
C513
! C514
! C515
! C516
! C518
! C519
C520
C308
C309
C313
C315
C317
C318
! C501
! C502
! C504
! C505
C506
C508
AE002129
AE001726
AE000272
AE000838
AE001726
AE002824
AE000838
AE002824
AE000838
AE000838
AE000272
AE002124
AE001275
AE000838
AE001732
AE001732
AE001275
AE001543
AE002132
AE003843
AE002132
AE001543
AE001729
AE001275
AE002830
AE001769
AE001275
AE001726
AE001726
AE001544
AE000838
AE001273
AE002125
AE001770
AE000838
AE001274
AE002124
AE001731
AE000838
BZ110150
AE000838
AE000838
AE000838
AE001767
BZ110229
AE000838
AD300788
AE002124
AE001726
BZ110143
AE001544
AE001544
AE001729
AE001544
BZ110119
BZ110025
BZ110076
AD301535
AE000336
AE002824
AE004694
AE002824
BZ110186
AE001544
BZ110175
AD301535
AE001722
BZ110256
AE004691
AD301535
AE001737
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Reference No.
CAPACITORS
CE
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CE
CC
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CC
CE
CE
CC
CP
CC
CE
CE
CC
CE
CE
CMP
CE
CE
CC
CE
CC
CC
CE
CE
CC
CS0PCH4E1J
CS0PB0414K
E50HU2470M
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PB0414K
CS0PB04H4K
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PB04H4K
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PB0N16K
E50HU2470M
CS0PB0315K
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PCH4H1J
CS0PCH4H1J
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU0470M
CS0PF04Q4Z
CS0PB02U4K
CS0PF04Q4Z
E50HU0470M
CS0PCH412J
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PCH4L1J
E50HU1330M
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PB0414K
CS0PB0414K
E50HU3100M
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PB04K3K
CS0PB04B3K
E50HU54R7M
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PCH4N2J
CS0PB0315K
CS0PCH4G2J
CS0PB0N16K
E50HU0101M
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PB0N16K
E02LU5R22M
E02LU4220M
CS0PB0N16K
E02LU5010M
CS0PB0315K
CS0PB0414K
E02LU0221M
E50HU3100M
E50HU3100M
CS0PCH412J
E50HU3100M
E02LF2222M
P2122B224M
E02LF1222M
E02LU2101M
E02LU1101M
CS0PB04H4K
P1M4T0183J
CS0PB04H4K
E62QFC470M
E50HU3100M
C03L0R7H2K
E02LU2101M
C0J0B0514K
CC3LE0MH3M
E61FF0222D
E02LU2101M
CS0PF0N16Z
Description
15 PF 50V CH
0.01 UF 50V B
47 UF 16V
1 UF 10V B
0.01 UF 50V B
0.022 UF 50V B
1 UF 10V B
0.022 UF 50V B
1 UF 10V B
1 UF 10V B
47 UF 16V
0.1 UF 25V B
0.1 UF 50V F
1 UF 10V B
22 PF 50V CH
22 PF 50V CH
0.1 UF 50V F
47 UF 6.3V
0.047 UF 50V F
0.068 UF 16V B
0.047 UF 50V F
47 UF 6.3V
100 PF 50V CH
0.1 UF 50V F
33 PF 50V CH
33 UF 10 V
0.1 UF 50V F
0.01 UF 50V B
0.01 UF 50V B
10 UF 25 V
1 UF 10V B
0.0027UF 50V B
0.0012UF 50V B
4.7 UF 50V
1 UF 10V B
390 PF 50V CH
0.1 UF 25V B
180 PF 50V CH
1 UF 10V B
100 UF 6.3V
1 UF 10V B
1 UF 10V B
1 UF 10V B
0.22 UF 50V
22 UF 35V
1 UF 10V B
1 UF 50V
0.1 UF 25V B
0.01 UF 50V B
220 UF 6.3V
10 UF 25 V
10 UF 25 V
100 PF 50V CH
10 UF 25 V
2200 UF 16V
0.22 UF 275V ECQUL
2200 UF 10V
100 UF 16V
100 UF 10V
0.022 UF 50V B
0.018 UF 50V
0.022 UF 50V B
47 UF 200V
10 UF 25 V
220 PF 2KV R
100 UF 16V
0.01 UF 500V B
0.0022UF 250V
2200 UF 6.3V
100 UF 16V
1 UF 10V F
K4-6
Location No.
TSB P/N
C721
C722
C723
C724
C725
C726
C727
C728
C730
C731
C732
C733
C735
C709
C710
C711
C712
C713
C714
C715
C716
C717
C718
C719
C720
C652
C653
C654
C655
C656
C701
C702
C703
C704
C705
C706
C707
C708
C521
C522
C524
C525
! C526
C527
! C531
C534
! C540
C544
C752
C753
C754
C755
C756
C757
C758
C759
C760
C762
C763
C739
C740
C741
C742
C743
C744
C746
C747
C748
C749
C750
C751
AE000838
AE002832
AE002832
AE001770
AE001770
AE000835
AE000838
AE001770
AE000838
AE002124
AE001770
AE001544
AE001544
AD301535
AE000838
AE001275
BZ110263
AE001770
AD301762
BZ110263
AE001275
BZ110150
AE001726
AE001737
79091097
AD301535
BZ110205
AE002824
BZ110172
BZ110256
AE001725
AE001723
AE001737
BZ110186
AE000838
AE000336
BZ110042
AE002831
AE002831
AE001544
AE000838
AE000838
AE000838
AE001726
AE000838
AE001734
AE000838
AE002824
AE001275
AE001544
AE002832
AD301762
AE001726
AE002832
AE001275
AE000838
AE000838
AE001734
AE001544
BZ110263
AE001275
AE001770
AE001726
AE001544
BZ110150
AE001728
AE001770
BZ110263
AE001726
AE001726
BZ110263
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Reference No.
CAPACITORS
CE
CE
CC
CC
CE
CC
CE
CC
CC
CE
CE
CE
CE
CC
CC
CE
CE
CE
CE
CC
CE
CE
CC
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CE
CE
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CE
CC
CE
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CE
CC
CE
CE
CC
CC
CE
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PCH4S2J
CS0PCH4S2J
E50HU54R7M
E50HU54R7M
CS0PB03L4K
CS0PB0N16K
E50HU54R7M
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PB0315K
E50HU54R7M
E50HU3100M
E50HU3100M
E02LU2101M
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU2220M
E50HU54R7M
E50HU52R2M
E50HU2220M
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU0101M
CS0PB0414K
CS0PF0N16Z
E50HU2101M
E02LU2101M
E02LU5220M
CS0PB04H4K
C03L0R7U2K
CC3LE0MH3M
CS0PB0413K
C0JTB05S2K
CS0PF0N16Z
E62QFC470M
CS0PB0N16K
E02LU1101M
E02LU1471M
CS0PCH4Q2J
CS0PCH4Q2J
E50HU3100M
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PB0414K
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PCH4U2J
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PB04H4K
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU3100M
CS0PCH4S2J
E50HU52R2M
CS0PB0414K
CS0PCH4S2J
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PCH4U2J
E50HU3100M
E50HU2220M
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU54R7M
CS0PB0414K
E50HU3100M
E50HU0101M
CS0PB04Q3K
E50HU54R7M
E50HU2220M
CS0PB0414K
CS0PB0414K
E50HU2220M
Description
1 UF 10V B
560 PF 50V CH
560 PF 50V CH
4.7 UF 50V
4.7 UF 50V
0.033 UF 25V B
1 UF 10V B
4.7 UF 50V
1 UF 10V B
0.1 UF 25V B
4.7 UF 50V
10 UF 25 V
10 UF 25 V
100 UF 16V
1 UF 10V B
0.1 UF 50V F
22 UF 16 V
4.7 UF 50V
2.2 UF 50V
22 UF 16 V
0.1 UF 50V F
100 UF 6.3V
0.01 UF 50V B
1 UF 10V F
100 UF 16 V
100 UF 16V
22 UF 50V
0.022 UF 50V B
680 PF 2KV R
0.0022UF 250V
0.001 UF 50V B
560 PF 500V B
1 UF 10V F
47 UF 200V
1 UF 10V B
100 UF 10V
470 UF 10V
470 PF 50V CH
470 PF 50V CH
10 UF 25 V
1 UF 10V B
1 UF 10V B
1 UF 10V B
0.01 UF 50V B
1 UF 10V B
680 PF 50V CH
1 UF 10V B
0.022 UF 50V B
0.1 UF 50V F
10 UF 25 V
560 PF 50V CH
2.2 UF 50V
0.01 UF 50V B
560 PF 50V CH
0.1 UF 50V F
1 UF 10V B
1 UF 10V B
680 PF 50V CH
10 UF 25 V
22 UF 16 V
0.1 UF 50V F
4.7 UF 50V
0.01 UF 50V B
10 UF 25 V
100 UF 6.3V
0.0047UF 50V B
4.7 UF 50V
22 UF 16 V
0.01 UF 50V B
0.01 UF 50V B
22 UF 16 V
K4-7
Location No.
TSB P/N
C2358
C2359
C2360
C3001
C3002
C3004
C3005
C3006
C3007
C3008
C3009
C3010
C3013
C2329
C2331
C2332
C2340
C2341
C2342
C2343
C2346
C2347
C2348
C2350
C2357
C764
C765
C766
C767
C768
C771
C2301
C2302
C2303
C2304
C2305
C2306
C2307
C2309
C2310
C2313
C2314
C2315
C2316
C2318
C2326
C2327
C2328
C3014
C3015
C3016
C3017
C3018
C3019
C3020
C3021
C3022
C3023
C3024
C3025
C3027
C3029
C3030
C3031
C3032
C3033
C3034
C3036
C3038
C3040
C3041
AE001543
AE002124
AE001275
BZ110150
BZ110150
AE001275
AE001543
AE001543
AE001275
AE002124
AE000838
AE001729
AE001729
AE001729
AE001729
AE000838
AE000838
AE002824
AE001725
AE001725
AE002124
AE001728
AE002124
AE001725
BZ110263
AE001275
BZ110150
AE001275
AE001770
AE001728
AE001726
AE001275
AE002124
AE002124
AE002824
AE002124
AE001275
AE002124
AE001275
BZ110034
AE002124
BZ110034
AE002124
AE001275
AE001725
AE001275
AE001543
AE001543
AE001731
AE001735
AE001543
AE001725
AE001730
AE002124
AE002824
AE001544
AE002831
BZ110143
AE003854
AE002129
AE001275
AE001543
AE001737
AE002822
AD301762
BZ110190
AE001737
AE001275
AE001737
AE001737
AE002822
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Reference No.
CAPACITORS
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CE
CC
CE
CE
CC
CC
CC
CE
CE
CE
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CC
CE
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
E50HU0470M
CS0PB0315K
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU0101M
E50HU0101M
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU0470M
E50HU0470M
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PB0315K
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PCH412J
CS0PCH412J
CS0PCH412J
CS0PCH412J
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PB04H4K
CS0PB0413K
CS0PB0413K
CS0PB0315K
CS0PB04Q3K
CS0PB0315K
CS0PB0413K
E50HU2220M
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU0101M
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU54R7M
CS0PB04Q3K
CS0PB0414K
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PB0315K
CS0PB0315K
CS0PB04H4K
CS0PB0315K
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PB0315K
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU1101M
CS0PB0315K
E50HU1101M
CS0PB0315K
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PB0413K
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU0470M
E50HU0470M
CS0PCH4G2J
CS0PCH4W2J
E50HU0470M
CS0PB0413K
CS0PCH4E2J
CS0PB0315K
CS0PB04H4K
E50HU3100M
CS0PCH4Q2J
E02LU0221M
CS0PCH4B1J
CS0PCH4E1J
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU0470M
CS0PF0N16Z
CS0PB04E3K
E50HU52R2M
E02LU2221M
CS0PF0N16Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0N16Z
CS0PF0N16Z
CS0PB04E3K
Description
47 UF 6.3V
0.1 UF 25V B
0.1 UF 50V F
100 UF 6.3V
100 UF 6.3V
0.1 UF 50V F
47 UF 6.3V
47 UF 6.3V
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 25V B
1 UF 10V B
100 PF 50V CH
100 PF 50V CH
100 PF 50V CH
100 PF 50V CH
1 UF 10V B
1 UF 10V B
0.022 UF 50V B
0.001 UF 50V B
0.001 UF 50V B
0.1 UF 25V B
0.0047UF 50V B
0.1 UF 25V B
0.001 UF 50V B
22 UF 16 V
0.1 UF 50V F
100 UF 6.3V
0.1 UF 50V F
4.7 UF 50V
0.0047UF 50V B
0.01 UF 50V B
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 25V B
0.1 UF 25V B
0.022 UF 50V B
0.1 UF 25V B
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 25V B
0.1 UF 50V F
100 UF 10 V
0.1 UF 25V B
100 UF 10 V
0.1 UF 25V B
0.1 UF 50V F
0.001 UF 50V B
0.1 UF 50V F
47 UF 6.3V
47 UF 6.3V
180 PF 50V CH
820 PF 50V CH
47 UF 6.3V
0.001 UF 50V B
150 PF 50V CH
0.1 UF 25V B
0.022 UF 50V B
10 UF 25 V
470 PF 50V CH
220 UF 6.3V
12 PF 50V CH
15 PF 50V CH
0.1 UF 50V F
47 UF 6.3V
1 UF 10V F
0.0015UF 50V B
2.2 UF 50V
220 UF 16V
1 UF 10V F
0.1 UF 50V F
1 UF 10V F
1 UF 10V F
0.0015UF 50V B
K4-8
Location No.
TSB P/N
C4029
C4030
C4031
C4032
C4033
C4034
C4035
C4036
C4037
C4038
C4039
C4040
C4041
C4017
C4018
C4019
C4020
C4021
C4022
C4023
C4024
C4025
C4026
C4027
C4028
C3044
C3045
C3049
C3050
C3052
C3053
C3061
C3065
C3066
C4001
C4002
C4003
C4004
C4007
C4008
C4009
C4010
C4011
C4012
C4013
C4014
C4015
C4016
C4044
C4045
C4046
C4047
C4050
C4051
C4052
C4053
C4056
C4057
C4058
C4059
C4060
C4061
C4062
C4063
C4064
C4065
C4066
C4067
C4068
C4069
C4070
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
BZ110150
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001726
AE001725
AE001275
AE004237
AE000840
AE002124
AE001275
AE001726
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE003854
AE000958
AE001729
AE001726
BZ110263
AE002124
AE001275
AE001275
AE001726
AE002125
AE001275
AE003847
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE000272
AE001275
BZ110150
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
BZ110150
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
BZ110150
AE003847
AE001731
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001768
AE001275
AE001726
AE000838
AE001543
BZ110150
AE001543
AE001768
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Reference No.
CAPACITORS
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CE
CE
CE
CE
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU0101M
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PB0414K
CS0PB0413K
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PCH450C
CS0PCH4K1J
CS0PB0315K
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PB0414K
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PCH4B1J
E50HU5R47M
CS0PCH412J
CS0PB0414K
E50HU2220M
CS0PB0315K
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PB0414K
CS0PB04B3K
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PB04K4K
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU2470M
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU0101M
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU0101M
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU0101M
CS0PB04K4K
CS0PCH4G2J
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU0221M
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PB0414K
CS0PB0N16K
E50HU0470M
E50HU0101M
E50HU0470M
E50HU0221M
Description
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
100 UF 6.3V
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.01 UF 50V B
0.001 UF 50V B
0.1 UF 50V F
5 PF 50V CH
27 PF 50V CH
0.1 UF 25V B
0.1 UF 50V F
0.01 UF 50V B
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
12 PF 50V CH
0.47 UF 50V
100 PF 50V CH
0.01 UF 50V B
22 UF 16 V
0.1 UF 25V B
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.01 UF 50V B
0.0012UF 50V B
0.1 UF 50V F
0.027 UF 50V B
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
47 UF 16V
0.1 UF 50V F
100 UF 6.3V
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
100 UF 6.3V
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
100 UF 6.3V
0.027 UF 50V B
180 PF 50V CH
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
220 UF 6.3V
0.1 UF 50V F
0.01 UF 50V B
1 UF 10V B
47 UF 6.3V
100 UF 6.3V
47 UF 6.3V
220 UF 6.3V
K4-9
Location No.
TSB P/N
C8008
C8009
C8010
C8011
C8012
C8013
C8014
C8015
C8019
C8023
C8024
C8025
C8028
C4096
C4097
C4098
C4099
C4100
C4104
C4105
C8003
C8004
C8005
C8006
C8007
C4071
C4072
C4074
C4075
C4076
C4077
C4078
C4080
C4081
C4082
C4083
C4084
C4085
C4086
C4087
C4088
C4089
C4090
C4091
C4092
C4093
C4094
C4095
C8031
C8032
C8033
C8034
C8035
C8036
C8037
C8038
C8040
C8042
C8043
C8044
C8045
C8046
C8047
C8048
C8049
C8050
C8051
C8054
C8055
C8056
C8057
AE001725
AE001726
AE002825
AE001726
BZ110034
AE001725
AE002825
BZ110096
AD301535
BZ110189
AE002124
AE001544
AE002822
AE002822
AE001544
AE001768
AE000336
BZ110188
AE001275
BZ110189
AE001275
AE002824
AE001543
AE002124
AE001729
AE001543
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
AE001275
BZ110150
AE001726
AE001275
AE001275
BZ110150
AE001543
AE001725
AE001725
AE001275
AE001275
BZ110034
BZ110034
AE001729
AE001729
AE001729
AE001729
AE001726
AE001770
AE001770
AE001733
BZ110143
AD301762
AD301762
BZ110263
BZ110263
AE001770
BZ110096
BZ210177
79091384
AE001730
AE001275
BZ110189
AD301535
79091384
AE001730
AE000337
AE002830
AE002830
BZ110151
AE001275
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Reference No.
CAPACITORS
CE
CC
CE
CC
CC
CE
CE
CC
CE
CE
CE
CC
CE
CC
CE
CC
CE
CC
CC
CE
CC
CE
CC
CC
CE
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CE
CE
CC
CC
CC
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
CE
CC
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CS0PB0413K
CS0PB0414K
CS0PCH411D
CS0PB0414K
E50HU1101M
CS0PB0413K
CS0PCH411D
E50HU2100M
E02LU2101M
E02LU0471M
CS0PB0315K
E50HU3100M
CS0PB04E3K
CS0PB04E3K
E50HU3100M
E50HU0221M
E02LU1101M
E50HU5100M
CS0PF0415Z
E02LU0471M
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PB04H4K
E50HU0470M
CS0PB0315K
CS0PCH412J
E50HU0470M
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU0101M
CS0PB0414K
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU0101M
E50HU0470M
CS0PB0413K
CS0PB0413K
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU1101M
E50HU1101M
CS0PCH412J
CS0PCH412J
CS0PCH412J
CS0PCH412J
CS0PB0414K
E50HU54R7M
E50HU54R7M
CS0PCH4H2J
E02LU0221M
E50HU52R2M
E50HU52R2M
E50HU2220M
E50HU2220M
E50HU54R7M
E50HU2100M
E02LU2470M
CS0PCH4L2J
CS0PCH4E2J
CS0PF0415Z
E02LU0471M
E02LU2101M
CS0PCH4L2J
CS0PCH4E2J
E02LU5330M
CS0PCH4L1J
CS0PCH4L1J
CS0RF0415Z
CS0PF0415Z
Description
0.001 UF 50V B
0.01 UF 50V B
10 PF 50V CH
0.01 UF 50V B
100 UF 10 V
0.001 UF 50V B
10 PF 50V CH
10 UF 16V
100 UF 16V
470 UF 6.3V
0.1 UF 25V B
10 UF 25 V
0.0015UF 50V B
0.0015UF 50V B
10 UF 25 V
220 UF 6.3V
100 UF 10V
10 UF 50V
0.1 UF 50V F
470 UF 6.3V
0.1 UF 50V F
0.022 UF 50V B
47 UF 6.3V
0.1 UF 25V B
100 PF 50V CH
47 UF 6.3V
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
100 UF 6.3V
0.01 UF 50V B
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
100 UF 6.3V
47 UF 6.3V
0.001 UF 50V B
0.001 UF 50V B
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
100 UF 10 V
100 UF 10 V
100 PF 50V CH
100 PF 50V CH
100 PF 50V CH
100 PF 50V CH
0.01 UF 50V B
4.7 UF 50V
4.7 UF 50V
220 PF 50V CH
220 UF 6.3V
2.2 UF 50V
2.2 UF 50V
22 UF 16 V
22 UF 16 V
4.7 UF 50V
10 UF 16V
47 UF 16V
330 PF 50V CH
150 PF 50V CH
0.1 UF 50V F
470 UF 6.3V
100 UF 16V
330 PF 50V CH
150 PF 50V CH
33 UF 50V
33 PF 50V CH
33 PF 50V CH
0.1 UF 50V F
0.1 UF 50V F
K4-10
D602
D656
D685
D2303
D2304
D3001
D3002
D3007
D3009
D4002
D4003
D4004
D4005
D8004
D8005
D8006
D8101
! D513
D514
! D515
D516
D518
! D519
! D522
! D523
D524
D526
! D527
D528
! D529
D501
! D502
! D503
D504
! D505
! D506
! D507
D508
D509
! D510
! D511
D512
Location No.
TSB P/N
C8058
C8059
C8060
C8062
C8063
C8064
C8065
C8075
C8104
C8105
C8106
C8107
C8108
C8109
C8110
C8111
C8112
C8113
C8114
C8115
C8119
C8120
C8121
C8122
C8124
C8125
C8126
C8127
AE002825
AE001275
AE002825
BZ110187
BZ110187
79091384
79091384
BZ210177
AE001730
AE003854
AE001730
AE001730
AE003854
AE001730
AE001729
AE003854
AE002830
AE000838
AE000838
AE003854
BZ110150
AE001275
AE001544
AE001725
AE001730
AE000838
AE000838
AE001730
AE001703
BZ410085
AE001703
BZ410086
BZ410086
AD301638
BZ410006
BZ410006
BZ410006
BZ410086
BZ410086
BZ410086
BZ410086
BZ410006
BZ410006
BZ410006
BZ410086
BZ410006
BZ410085
BZ410085
BZ410006
BZ410085
BZ410085
BZ410007
BZ410006
BZ410103
BZ410113
BZ410115
BZ410006
BZ410085
AD300070
BZ410033
BZ410020
BZ410006
BZ410022
AE006060
BZ410037
BZ410006
AD302208
BZ410085
BZ410006
BZ410085
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
CS0PCH411D
CS0PF0415Z
CS0PCH411D
E02LT0102M
E02LT0102M
CS0PCH4L2J
CS0PCH4L2J
E02LU2470M
CS0PCH4E2J
CS0PCH4B1J
CS0PCH4E2J
CS0PCH4E2J
CS0PCH4B1J
CS0PCH4E2J
CS0PCH412J
CS0PCH4B1J
CS0PCH4L1J
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PCH4B1J
E50HU0101M
CS0PF0415Z
E50HU3100M
CS0PB0413K
CS0PCH4E2J
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PB0N16K
CS0PCH4E2J
0021E5Q212
D2WXN40050
0021E5Q212
DD7R0S3550
DD7R0S3550
0010E00330
D1VT001330
D1VT001330
D1VT001330
DD7R0S3550
DD7R0S3550
DD7R0S3550
DD7R0S3550
D1VT001330
D1VT001330
D1VT001330
DD7R0S3550
D1VT001330
D2WXN40050
D2WXN40050
D1VT001330
D2WXN40050
D2WXN40050
D23TGP15J0
D1VT001330
D2WXGP10J0
D97U02201B
D2LKB340L0
D1VT001330
D2WXN40050
D97U01201B
D28T21DQN4
D97U05R11B
D1VT001330
D97U06R81B
D28T0ERB20
D97U03301B
D1VT001330
D97U03R31B
D2WXN40050
D1VT001330
D2WXN40050
Reference No.
CAPACITORS
CC
CC
CE
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CC
CE
CE
CC
CC
DIODES
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,RECTIFIER
DIODE,ZENER
DIODE,SCHOTTKY
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,ZENER
DIODE,SCHOTTKY
DIODE,ZENER
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,ZENER
DIODE,RECTIFIER
DIODE,ZENER
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,ZENER
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
LED
DIODE,SILICON
LED
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
LTE-3271T-012A-O
1SS133T-77
1SS133T-77
1SS133T-77
1SS133T-77
1SS133T-77
1SS133T-77
Description
10 PF 50V CH
0.1 UF 50V F
10 PF 50V CH
1000 UF 6.3V
1000 UF 6.3V
330 PF 50V CH
330 PF 50V CH
47 UF 16V
150 PF 50V CH
12 PF 50V CH
150 PF 50V CH
150 PF 50V CH
12 PF 50V CH
150 PF 50V CH
100 PF 50V CH
12 PF 50V CH
33 PF 50V CH
1 UF 10V B
1 UF 10V B
12 PF 50V CH
100 UF 6.3V
0.1 UF 50V F
10 UF 25 V
0.001 UF 50V B
150 PF 50V CH
1 UF 10V B
1 UF 10V B
150 PF 50V CH
1SS133T-77
1N4005-EIC
1N4005-EIC
1SS133T-77
1N4005-EIC
1N4005-EIC
RGP15J-G23
1SS133T-77
RGP10J-EIC
MTZJ22B T-77
SB340L-6737
1SS133T-77
1N4005-EIC
21DQ04N-TA2B1
1SS133T-77
MTZJ6.8B T-77
10ERB20-TA1B2
MTZJ33B T-77
1SS133T-77
1N4005-EIC
1SS133T-77
1N4005-EIC
LTL-1CHGT-002A
1N4005-EIC
LTL-1CHGT-002A
K4-11
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Description Location No.
TSB P/N
D8111
D8112
IC101
! IC501
! IC502
! IC503
IC701
! IC2301
IC2304
IC3001
IC3003
IC3099
IC4001
IC4002
! IC4003
IC4007
IC4008
IC4009
IC8001
IC8002
IC8003
IC8005
IC8102
Q655
Q656
Q657
Q658
Q659
Q660
Q661
Q662
Q663
Q664
Q665
Q666
Q2301
Q2302
Q2303
Q2304
Q2305
Q3001
Q3002
Q3003
Q3004
Q3005
Q3006
Q101
Q102
Q103
Q104
Q105
Q107
Q109
Q301
! Q501
! Q502
! Q503
! Q504
! Q505
Q506
! Q507
Q509
! Q510
Q513
Q514
Q651
Q652
Q653
Q654
BZ410086
BZ410086
AE005890
AD302211
BZ611089
AE002809
AE004692
AE003581
AE005769
AE007384
AD301641
AE005421
AE005760
AE005421
AE006061
AE007187
AE006454
AE006454
AE006711
AD301988
AE005771
AD301988
AE003584
BZ510021
BZ510021
BZ510021
BZ510021
BZ510001
BZ510021
BZ510001
BZ510021
BZ510021
BZ510021
BZ510001
BZ510026
BZ510112
AE003592
AE002626
AE002626
AE002626
BZ410107
BZ410107
BZ510026
BZ410106
BZ410106
BZ410097
AE002626
AE002626
BZ510026
BZ510070
BZ510073
BZ510001
AE002626
AE002626
AE002251
BZ510070
BZ510105
BZ510077
AE006717
BZ510021
BZ510070
BZ510021
AE006717
AE002626
AE002626
BZ510001
BZ510021
BZ510021
BZ510001
TNYJC05001
TNYJC05001
TNYJC05001
TNYJC05001
T6YJ1037K0
TNYJC05001
T6YJ1037K0
TNYJC05001
TNYJC05001
TNYJC05001
T6YJ1037K0
TPYJC05001
T67J1036K0
T67J048TL0
T8YJ2412K0
T8YJ2412K0
T8YJ2412K0
0002700690
0002700690
TPYJC05001
0002700680
0002700680
0000M00390
T8YJ2412K0
T8YJ2412K0
TPYJC05001
TCAT032034
TAATA12660
T6YJ1037K0
T8YJ2412K0
T8YJ2412K0
T25F035630
TCAT032034
TCAT03209Y
TAAT012714
TD3T018350
TNYJC05001
TCAT032034
TNYJC05001
TD3T018350
T8YJ2412K0
T8YJ2412K0
T6YJ1037K0
TNYJC05001
TNYJC05001
T6YJ1037K0
I03F3206ME
I1KJ9A431A
I1KA98R09A
000220002W
I03F670BM0
I03F065650
I07J003580
I54F50157A
I9UF032310
I57J0L02F0
ICQK068620
I57J0L02F0
I07F9E00W0
S2H201HF03
IFLJ0622H6
IFLJ0622H6
I04J045800
I0UF015010
I0UF015110
I0UF015010
I17F017530
Reference No.
DD7R0S3550
DD7R0S3550
DIODES
DIODE,SILICON
DIODE,SILICON
ICS
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
PHOTO COUPLER
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
IC
TRANSISTORS
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
FET
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
LA71206M-MPB-E
KIA431A-AT
KIA78R09API
PS2561AL1-1-V(W)
LA72670BM-L-MPB-E
LA6565-TE-L-E
BA10358FV-E2
OEC0157A
PST3231NR
BR24L02F-WE2
ZR36862PQCG
BR24L02F-WE2
BA33E00WHFP-TR
SST39VF800A-70-4C-EKE
K4S161622H-UC60
K4S161622H-UC60
RC4580IDR
MM1501XNRE
MM1511XNRE
MM1501XNRE
PCM1753DBQR
DTA124EKAT146
KTC3203_Y-AT
KTA1266-AT(Y,GR)
2SA1037AKT146R,S
2SK3563(ORION_Q)
KTC3203_Y-AT
KTC3209_Y-AT
KTA1271_Y-AT
2SD1835S/T-AA
DTC124EKAT146
KTC3203_Y-AT
DTC124EKAT146
2SD1835S/T-AA
2SC2412KT146 R,S
2SA1037AKT146R,S
DTC124EKAT146
DTC124EKAT146
2SA1037AKT146R,S
DTC124EKAT146
DTC124EKAT146
DTC124EKAT146
DTC124EKAT146
2SA1037AKT146R,S
DTC124EKAT146
2SA1037AKT146R,S
DTC124EKAT146
DTC124EKAT146
DTC124EKAT146
2SA1037AKT146R,S
DTA124EKAT146
2SA1036KT146
2SA2048TL
RPI-303
RPI-303
DTA124EKAT146
RPI-352C40N
RPI-352C40N
ST-304L
K4-12
J651
J652
J653
J8001
J8002
J8006
J8007
J8008
SW601
SW602
SW603
SW604
SW605
SW685
SW686
SW687
SW689
SW690
L704
L705
L3002
L3003
L4001
L8001
L8002
L8006
L8007
L8008
L8009
L8010
L8102
L101
L102
L103
L104
L107
L301
! L501
L505
L506
L701
L702
L703
L8103
L8104
L8105
! T501
Location No.
TSB P/N
Q3007
Q3008
Q8001
Q8002
Q8003
Q8004
Q8005
Q8006
Q8007
Q8008
Q8009
Q8010
Q8011
Q8012
Q8019
Q8020
Q8021
Q8022
Q8023
Q8024
Q8101
BZ510021
BZ410097
AE002626
BZ510045
BZ510021
BZ510073
AE002626
AE002626
BZ510026
AE002626
AE002626
BZ510081
BZ510021
AE002626
BZ510001
BZ510001
BZ510001
BZ510021
BZ510001
BZ510020
BZ510045
AE006693
AE006692
AE006692
AE002758
AE002759
AE002760
AE002761
AE002813
AE001707
AE001707
AE001707
AE001707
AE001707
AE001707
AE001707
AE001707
AE001707
AE001707
AE004672
BZ310041
AE002102
BZ310039
BZ310039
BZ310039
AE004671
BZ310039
BZ310150
BZ310183
BZ310183
BZ310039
BZ310039
BZ310039
BZ310150
AE000773
BZ310191
BZ310147
BZ310147
BZ310041
BZ310041
BZ310041
BZ310041
BZ310041
AE000828
AE000828
AE000828
AE000828
AE004673
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Reference No.
TRANSISTORS
TNYJC05001
0000M00390
T8YJ2412K0
TNYJD05001
TNYJC05001
TAATA12660
T8YJ2412K0
T8YJ2412K0
TPYJC05001
T8YJ2412K0
T8YJ2412K0
TPYJA05001
TNYJC05001
T8YJ2412K0
T6YJ1037K0
T6YJ1037K0
T6YJ1037K0
TNYJC05001
T6YJ1037K0
TNYJB05001
TNYJD05001
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
TRANSISTOR,SILICON
031626010R
02167F101J
021LA65R6K
02167F220J
02167F220J
02167F220J
029X000117
02167F220J
02167E220K
021LA6220J
021LA6220J
02167F220J
02167F220J
02167F220J
02167E220K
021LA6120J
02167F2R2J
021LA6R33M
021LA6R33M
02167F101J
02167F101J
02167F101J
02167F101J
02167F101J
02167F1R0K
02167F1R0K
02167F1R0K
02167F1R0K
0481291244
COILS &TRANSFORMERS
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL,LINE FILTER
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
COIL
TRANSFORMER,SWITCHING
JACKS
060J421038
060J401097
060J401097
060J411031
060J431020
060J411033
060J411032
063D700008 JACK
SWITCHES
0504R01T38
0504R01T38
0504R01T38
0504R01T38
0504R01T38
0504R01T38
0504R01T38
0504R01T38
0504R01T38
0504R01T38
Description
DTC124EKAT146
ST-304L
DTC144EKAT146
DTC124EKAT146
KTA1266-AT(Y,GR)
DTA124EKAT146
DTA143EKAT146
DTC124EKAT146
2SA1037AKT146R,S
2SA1037AKT146R,S
2SA1037AKT146R,S
DTC124EKAT146
2SA1037AKT146R,S
DTC114EKAT146
DTC144EKAT146
MSP-281V30-A
MSP-281V41-B
MSP-281V41-B
MSP-213V1-432_NI_LF
MSP-213V2-432_NI_LF
MSP-213V1-732_NI_LF
MSP-213V1-652_NI_LF
MDC-070V-B_LF
EVQ11L05R
EVQ11L05R
EVQ11L05R
EVQ11L05R
EVQ11L05R
EVQ11L05R
EVQ11L05R
EVQ11L05R
EVQ11L05R
EVQ11L05R
22 UH
22 UH
22 UH
12 UH
2.2 UH
0.33 UH
0.33 UH
100 UH
100 UH
100 UH
100 UH
100 UH
1 UH
1626010
100 UH
5.6 UH
22 UH
22 UH
22 UH
SS11VL-05230
22 UH
22 UH
22 UH
22 UH
22 UH
1 UH
1 UH
1 UH
81291244
K4-13
Location No.
TSB P/N
SW691
SW3001
AE001707
BZ612016
PCB010
PCB130
PCB270
PCB280
CD102
CD103
! CD501
CD601
CD681
CP101
CP102
CP103
CP501
CP601
CP651
CP652
CP681
CD4002
CD6002
CD6003
CD8001
CP2301
CP2302
CP2303
! CP3001
CP8001
CP8101
! F501
FH501
FH502
OS651
TM601
! TU301
V651
X101
X3001
X4001
B501
B2301
B2302
B2303
B2304
B2305
B4001
B4002
B4003
B4005
B4006
B4007
B4008
B4009
B4010
B4011
B4012
B4013
B4014
B4016
B4018
B8103
BT601
AE007386
AE007387
AE007388
AE007389
AE004682
AE007029
AE004681
AE006700
AE006699
BZ614011
AE004674
AD301649
BZ614214
AE006694
AE004675
AE006695
AE001711
AE007190
AE001243
AE006433
AE004683
AE003571
AE005934
AE005935
BZ614289
AE004677
AE004676
AE001715
AE002634
AE002634
AE002815
AE006697
AE006569
AE006690
AE001717
AE004679
AD301803
BZ310122
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005476
AE005640
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
Reference No.
SWITCHES
122F041508
W9L6012042
1209414910
122H061106
122H050801
0697290620
069J740599
067U002019
069S2B0629
069EV63050
069J750589
069WV6002A
069J750019
06C32B1104
06CPL02006
06CPBA2006
122F0E1001
069GYOT119
069EV53030
069EV63030
06972C0010
069J7E0599
069J7E0589
081PC2R505
06710T0009
06710T0009
077Q037009
076D0KU010
0162300044
0040E34005
100DT3R528
100GT01006
100BT02701
024HT03563
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
0246C51024
141R004016
0504R01T38
0508S11001
A2F402H010
A2F402H130
A2F402H270
A2F402H280
P.C.BOARD ASSEMBLIES
MISCELLANEOUS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
CORE,BEADS
BATTERY,MANGAN
CORD,JUMPER
FLAT CABLE
CORD,AC BUSH
CORD,JUMPER
CORD,JUMPER
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CABLE
CORD,JUMPER
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
CONNECTOR PCB SIDE
FUSE
HOLDER,FUSE
HOLDER,FUSE
TRANSMITTER
RF UNIT
CRYSTAL
CRYSTAL
CRYSTAL
Description
EVQ11L05R
LSA-1144EAU
DME043A
DME031A
DEE042A
DEE043A
W4BRH3.5X6X1.0X2
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
MMZ1608R102CT
GR03X-SP2
2F041508
AWM2468 AWG26 2C BLACK 120MM
9414910
2H061106
2H050801
TOC-C09X-A1
IMSA-9604S-04C
B2013H02-2P
A2001WV2-11P
00_6232_006_102_800+
IMSA-9604S-05F
TOC-B06X-B1
IMSA-9604S-05Z13
C32B1104
CPL02006
TD-OR0201R
2F0E1001
09-5000-024-001-001
00_6232_005_006_800+
00_6232_006_006_800+
TMC-J12P-B2
IMSA-9604S-14C
IMSA-9604S-14F
51MS025L
EYF-52BCY
EYF-52BCY
PIC-37043LO-H
SE-R0170
115-V-HA35ARE
LTG-0338AM-J
HC-49/U
B10000C001
HC-49U/S
K4-14
ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST
RESISTOR
RC...................
CARBON RESISTOR
CAPACITORS
CC...................
CERAMIC CAPACITOR
CE...................
ALUMI ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR
CP...................
POLYESTER CAPACITOR
CPP.................. POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR
CPL.................. PLASTIC CAPACITOR
CMP................... METAL POLYESTER CAPACITOR
CMPL................ METAL PLASTIC CAPACITOR
CMPP................ METAL POLYPROPYLENE CAPACITOR
K4-15
TOSHIBA CORPORATION
1-1, SHIBAURA 1-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 105-8001, JAPAN

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- DVD player with Video CD playback
- VHS cassette recorder
- Timer recording
- Stereo recording
- PBC function for Video CDs
- Dolby Digital audio decoding
- S-Video and DVD Component outputs
- Digital audio output
- NTSC colour system